WO2014045474A1 - Lamp - Google Patents

Lamp Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014045474A1
WO2014045474A1 PCT/JP2013/001602 JP2013001602W WO2014045474A1 WO 2014045474 A1 WO2014045474 A1 WO 2014045474A1 JP 2013001602 W JP2013001602 W JP 2013001602W WO 2014045474 A1 WO2014045474 A1 WO 2014045474A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
case
lamp
circuit board
lamp according
light emitting
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2013/001602
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
仕田 智
豊 西田
隆在 植本
Original Assignee
パナソニック株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by パナソニック株式会社 filed Critical パナソニック株式会社
Priority to JP2013531976A priority Critical patent/JP5379336B1/en
Priority to CN201390000714.1U priority patent/CN204805983U/en
Publication of WO2014045474A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014045474A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21VFUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21V23/00Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices
    • F21V23/003Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array
    • F21V23/004Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array arranged on a substrate, e.g. a printed circuit board
    • F21V23/006Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array arranged on a substrate, e.g. a printed circuit board the substrate being distinct from the light source holder
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21KNON-ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES USING LUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING ELECTROCHEMILUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING CHARGES OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL; LIGHT SOURCES USING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AS LIGHT-GENERATING ELEMENTS; LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21K9/00Light sources using semiconductor devices as light-generating elements, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] or lasers
    • F21K9/20Light sources comprising attachment means
    • F21K9/23Retrofit light sources for lighting devices with a single fitting for each light source, e.g. for substitution of incandescent lamps with bayonet or threaded fittings
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21KNON-ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES USING LUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING ELECTROCHEMILUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING CHARGES OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL; LIGHT SOURCES USING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AS LIGHT-GENERATING ELEMENTS; LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21K9/00Light sources using semiconductor devices as light-generating elements, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] or lasers
    • F21K9/20Light sources comprising attachment means
    • F21K9/23Retrofit light sources for lighting devices with a single fitting for each light source, e.g. for substitution of incandescent lamps with bayonet or threaded fittings
    • F21K9/238Arrangement or mounting of circuit elements integrated in the light source
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21KNON-ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES USING LUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING ELECTROCHEMILUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING CHARGES OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL; LIGHT SOURCES USING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AS LIGHT-GENERATING ELEMENTS; LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21K9/00Light sources using semiconductor devices as light-generating elements, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] or lasers
    • F21K9/20Light sources comprising attachment means
    • F21K9/27Retrofit light sources for lighting devices with two fittings for each light source, e.g. for substitution of fluorescent tubes
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21VFUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21V11/00Screens not covered by groups F21V1/00, F21V3/00, F21V7/00 or F21V9/00
    • F21V11/08Screens not covered by groups F21V1/00, F21V3/00, F21V7/00 or F21V9/00 using diaphragms containing one or more apertures
    • F21V11/14Screens not covered by groups F21V1/00, F21V3/00, F21V7/00 or F21V9/00 using diaphragms containing one or more apertures with many small apertures
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21VFUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21V7/00Reflectors for light sources
    • F21V7/0008Reflectors for light sources providing for indirect lighting
    • F21V7/0016Reflectors for light sources providing for indirect lighting on lighting devices that also provide for direct lighting, e.g. by means of independent light sources, by splitting of the light beam, by switching between both lighting modes
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21VFUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21V3/00Globes; Bowls; Cover glasses
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21VFUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21V3/00Globes; Bowls; Cover glasses
    • F21V3/02Globes; Bowls; Cover glasses characterised by the shape
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21VFUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21V7/00Reflectors for light sources
    • F21V7/04Optical design
    • F21V7/041Optical design with conical or pyramidal surface
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
    • F21Y2103/00Elongate light sources, e.g. fluorescent tubes
    • F21Y2103/10Elongate light sources, e.g. fluorescent tubes comprising a linear array of point-like light-generating elements
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
    • F21Y2103/00Elongate light sources, e.g. fluorescent tubes
    • F21Y2103/30Elongate light sources, e.g. fluorescent tubes curved
    • F21Y2103/33Elongate light sources, e.g. fluorescent tubes curved annular
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
    • F21Y2107/00Light sources with three-dimensionally disposed light-generating elements
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
    • F21Y2115/00Light-generating elements of semiconductor light sources
    • F21Y2115/10Light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L2924/00Indexing scheme for arrangements or methods for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies as covered by H01L24/00
    • H01L2924/19Details of hybrid assemblies other than the semiconductor or other solid state devices to be connected
    • H01L2924/191Disposition
    • H01L2924/19101Disposition of discrete passive components
    • H01L2924/19107Disposition of discrete passive components off-chip wires

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a lamp using a semiconductor light emitting element, and more particularly to miniaturization of a case.
  • LEDs Light Emitting Diodes
  • Such a lamp is generally a case in which a large number of LEDs are mounted on one mounting board and between the back side of the mounting board and a base as a power receiving unit that receives power from the outside (in Patent Document 1).
  • Outer member 2 A circuit unit for lighting the LED is housed in the internal space, and the light emitted from the LED is emitted to the outside through a globe as a translucent cover member. .
  • lamps using LEDs are not limited to light bulbs, and straight tube LED lamps such as fluorescent lamps are also becoming popular in recent years.
  • the circuit unit is housed inside the case, so the case part has to be large, and since the shape and size of the incandescent light bulb are different, The fitting compatibility rate with conventional lighting fixtures that have used incandescent bulbs is not 100%.
  • a case In a straight tube lamp, a case is attached to both ends of a light-transmitting bulb that covers the light-emitting part.
  • the case part is a non-light-emitting part, if the case size is large, the non-light-emitting part is There is a problem that the impression that it grows is bad.
  • a circuit unit is usually housed inside the case.
  • the circuit unit is configured by mounting various electric main components on a circuit board. Therefore, if the size of the case portion is reduced, the circuit unit needs to be reduced in size. For that purpose, a method of miniaturizing the circuit board and mounting various electronic components on the circuit board at high density is conceivable.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a lamp having a miniaturized case.
  • a lamp according to the present invention is a circuit having a light emitting unit in which a plurality of semiconductor light emitting elements are arranged on a mounting substrate, a power receiving unit that receives power from the outside, a plurality of electronic components, and a circuit board on which they are mounted.
  • a lamp having a unit and a cylindrical or bowl-shaped case that accommodates the circuit unit, wherein the circuit unit is disposed in the case with the circuit board being along the inner peripheral surface of the case. It is housed.
  • the area of the circuit board can be made as large as possible with respect to the space inside the case.
  • the area of the circuit board necessary for mounting a plurality of electronic components can be ensured.
  • FIG. 1 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ in FIG. 2, showing a state where the circuit unit is housed in a case. It is a top view which shows schematic structure at the time of expand
  • 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Embodiment 2.
  • FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 1 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to a first modification.
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 2.
  • 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 3.
  • FIG. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 3.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to modification example 4; 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 5.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 7.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 8.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 9.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows schematic structure of the lamp
  • FIG. 12 It is a side view which shows schematic structure of the lamp
  • 14 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 13.
  • 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 15.
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 16.
  • FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 20.
  • FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the state in which the circuit unit of the lamp
  • FIG. 28 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 24.
  • FIG. 22 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 24.
  • FIG. 26 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 25.
  • FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 25.
  • 27 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 26.
  • FIG. 42 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 27.
  • FIG. FIG. 38 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 28.
  • 29 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 28.
  • FIG. It is a top view which shows the state which removed the glove
  • FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 33.
  • FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 34.
  • 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 35.
  • FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 36.
  • FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 37.
  • FIG. FIG. 38 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration when a circuit unit according to Modification 37 is developed on a plane.
  • (A) is a top view which shows schematic structure at the time of developing the circuit unit which concerns on the modification 38 on a plane.
  • FIG. (B) is a partially cutaway perspective view schematically showing a circuit unit according to a modified example 38 in a curved state when accommodated in a case.
  • (A) is a perspective view of the lamp
  • (B) is the perspective view of the lamp
  • 42 is an exploded perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 39.
  • FIG. (A) is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a case according to Modification 39.
  • FIG. (B) is a perspective view which shows typically the state by which the light emission part which concerns on the modification 39 was attached to the case shown to (a).
  • FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 39.
  • FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a circuit unit according to Modification 40.
  • FIG. (A) is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a circuit unit according to Modification 41.
  • FIG. (B) is a partially cutaway perspective view schematically showing a connection mode between a connector and a circuit board of a circuit unit according to Modification 41.
  • FIG. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 42.
  • FIG. 1 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of the lamp 1.
  • 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ in FIG.
  • the lamp 1 includes a light emitting unit 10, a case 70, a power receiving unit 80, a globe 40, a circuit unit 50, and the like as main components.
  • the alternate long and short dash line drawn along the vertical direction of the paper indicates the lamp axis J ⁇ b> 1 of the lamp 1, and the upper side of the paper is the front of the lamp 1 and the lower side of the paper is the rear of the lamp 1.
  • the light emitting unit 10 includes an LED 12 as a semiconductor light emitting element used as a light source, a mounting substrate 11 on which the LED 12 is mounted, and a sealing body 13 that covers the LED 12 on the mounting substrate 11.
  • the light emitting unit 10 is disposed on the opposite side of the power receiving unit 80 via the circuit unit 50, and the main emission direction of light emitted from the LED 12 (hereinafter simply referred to as “main emission direction”) is in front of the lamp 1. It is arranged facing (upward on the page).
  • the sealing body 13 is mainly made of a translucent material, but when it is necessary to convert the wavelength of the light emitted from the LED 12 to a predetermined wavelength, the wavelength of the light is converted into the translucent material. Wavelength conversion material is mixed.
  • the translucent material for example, a silicone resin can be used, and as the wavelength conversion material, for example, phosphor particles can be used.
  • the light emitting unit 10 may be, for example, a combination of an ultraviolet light emitting LED 12 and each color phosphor particle that emits light in three primary colors (red, green, and blue). Further, a material containing a substance that absorbs light of a certain wavelength and emits light of a wavelength different from the absorbed light, such as a semiconductor, a metal complex, an organic dye, or a pigment, may be used as the wavelength conversion material.
  • the case 70 is a cylindrical member made of a material having thermal conductivity, and includes a large diameter portion 71 and a small diameter portion 72.
  • the case 70 is formed from a heat conductive resin.
  • the large-diameter portion 71 and the small-diameter portion 72 have, for example, a substantially cylindrical shape that is open on both sides, and are integrally connected to each other in the axial direction so that the cylindrical shaft and the lamp shaft J1 coincide with each other. .
  • the large-diameter portion 71 located on the front side has a substantially cylindrical shape with a diameter reduced from the front toward the rear, and the circuit unit 50 is accommodated in the large-diameter portion 71.
  • a power receiving unit 80 is externally fitted to the small diameter portion 72 located on the rear side, and the rear side opening 75 of the case 70 is thereby blocked.
  • the opening on the front side (the globe 40 side) of the case 70 is closed by the mounting substrate 11, and the case 70 and the mounting substrate 11 are integrally formed.
  • the case 70 and the mounting substrate 11 are integrally formed, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and the number of processes in assembling, which can improve productivity.
  • a thermal conductive resin can be used as a material having thermal conductivity for forming the case 70. By doing in this way, the heat generated from the circuit unit 50 and the light emitting unit 10 and propagated to the case 70 can be efficiently propagated and radiated to the power receiving unit 80 side.
  • the power receiving unit 80 is a member for receiving electric power from the socket of the lighting fixture when the lamp 1 is attached to the lighting fixture and turned on, and is a so-called base in the present embodiment.
  • the type of the power receiving unit 80 is not particularly limited, but an Edison type E26 base is used in the present embodiment.
  • the power receiving unit 80 includes a shell part 81 having a substantially cylindrical shape and an outer peripheral surface being a male screw, and an eyelet part 83 attached to the shell part 81 via an insulating part 82.
  • the globe 40 is a member that covers the light emitting unit 10, and the opening-side end 41 of the globe 40 is fitted into a groove 74 provided in the front-side end 73 of the case 70 by press-fitting.
  • the inner surface 42 of the globe 40 is subjected to a diffusion process for diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting unit 10, for example, a diffusion process using silica, white pigment, or the like.
  • the light that has entered the inner surface 42 of the globe 40 passes through the globe 40 and is extracted outside the globe 40.
  • the globe 40 may be fixed to the case 70 by fitting the opening side end 41 of the globe 40 into the groove 74 after applying an adhesive or the like in the groove 74.
  • the shape of the globe 40 is a shape imitating a bulb of an A-type bulb, but is not limited to this, and may be any shape.
  • the circuit unit 50 is mainly for lighting the LED 12, and includes a circuit board 51 and various electronic components 52 arranged on the circuit board 51.
  • the electronic component 52 is mainly for converting the power received from the outside via the power receiving unit 80 to cause the LED 12 to emit light.
  • the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the electronic component 52 includes a sensor for detecting brightness, temperature, and the like, and a component for receiving and processing a signal related to dimming, turning on / off, etc. from the remote control. May be.
  • the electronic component 52a is the tall one among the electronic components 52.
  • the “back” of the electronic component 52 here refers to the electronic component from the main surface of the circuit board 51 on which the electronic component in the normal direction of the circuit board 51 is mounted at the position where the electronic component 52 is disposed. 52 means the distance to the tip.
  • an electronic component 52 when there is no particular need to distinguish between a tall electronic component and a non-tall electronic component, they are simply referred to as an electronic component 52.
  • FIG. 2 and other drawings not all of the illustrated electronic components are necessarily denoted by reference numerals. Some electronic components 52 may be omitted from the reference numerals.
  • the circuit unit 50 and the power receiving unit 80 are electrically connected by a wiring 53. Further, the circuit unit 50 and the light emitting unit 10 are electrically connected via the connector 16 by the wiring 15 arranged through the wiring hole 14 which is a through hole provided in the mounting substrate 11.
  • the circuit board 51 is made of, for example, a flexible resin such as a flexible board. As shown in FIG. 3, the circuit board 51 is curved with the outer peripheral surface 51a on the outer side and the inner peripheral surface 51b on the inner side. It is accommodated in the diameter portion 71.
  • the circuit unit 50 is inserted into the case 70 from the rear opening 75 in a state where the circuit board 51 is bent. After being inserted into the case 70, the circuit board 51 tries to expand in the large diameter portion 71 due to its own elastic force, but contact with the inner peripheral surface 71 a of the large diameter portion 71 is stopped. And the circuit unit 50 is hold
  • the circuit board 51 can be arranged along the inner peripheral surface 71a, so that the area of the circuit board can be increased as compared with the case of using a flat circuit board as in the prior art. it can. Thereby, even when the case 70 is downsized, the area of the circuit board 51 can be maximized. That is, the mounting area of the electronic component 52 can be maximized.
  • all the electronic components 52 are mounted on the inner peripheral surface 51b of the circuit board 51 and are not mounted on the outer peripheral surface 51a side. Therefore, even when the case 70 is formed of a conductive material such as metal, the electronic component 52 does not contact the inner peripheral surface 71a of the case 70, and a problem such as a short circuit does not occur. However, even in such a case, a part of the lead wire of the electronic component 52 may protrude to the outer peripheral surface 51a side of the circuit board 51 or a process such as soldering may be performed on the outer peripheral surface 51a. Conceivable. In that case, an insulating resin is coated on the outer peripheral surface 51 a of the circuit board 51 to form a protective film, or an insulating protective film is similarly formed on the inner peripheral surface 71 a of the case 70. May be.
  • an adhesive member may be disposed on the bottom surface 77 of the large-diameter portion 71 to fix the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51.
  • an adhesive or the like may be applied to the rear side end portion 51 c and adhered to the bottom surface 77. Thereby, the circuit unit 50 can be stably held in the large-diameter portion 71.
  • FIG. 4 is a plan view of the circuit unit 50 in a state where the circuit board 51 is spread on the plane, as viewed from the inner peripheral surface 51b side of the circuit board 51.
  • the circuit board 51 in the expanded state, has a shape in which a fan-shaped central portion is cut out by a smaller fan having the same central angle. In other words, the shape of the ring is cut out by two straight lines passing through the center.
  • the shape expands on the front side and decreases as it goes to the rear side, so that the shape fits the shape of the inner peripheral surface 71 a of the large diameter portion 71. Can be taken.
  • the circuit board 51 is arranged in a curved shape along the inner peripheral surface 71 a of the case 70, a circuit that can be accommodated in the internal space of the case 70.
  • the area of the substrate 51 can be increased. Thereby, even when the case 70 is reduced in size, a space for mounting the electronic component 52 and forming a wiring pattern can be secured on the circuit board 51. That is, the case 70 can be reduced in size.
  • the circuit board is made of a flexible resin such as a flexible board, but is not limited thereto.
  • a flexible resin such as a flexible board
  • FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment.
  • symbol is attached
  • the lamp 100 includes a globe 40, a circuit unit 50, a power receiving unit 80, a light emitting unit 110, and a case 170 as main components.
  • the light emitting unit 110 is provided apart from the case 170.
  • the case 170 is made of an insulating material having thermal conductivity such as a resin like the case 70 in the first embodiment, and the basic configuration is the same as the case 70 except for the points described below.
  • the LED 12 is not mounted on the front surface 178 that closes the opening on the front side of the large-diameter portion 171, and the opening 179 is provided in the center of the front surface 178.
  • the opening 179 is formed into a cylindrical heat pipe. 20 penetrates. Further, the diameter of the heat pipe 20 and the diameter of the opening 179 are substantially equal to each other, and there is substantially no gap between the heat pipe 20 and the opening 179. Thereby, the wobble of the heat pipe 20 is suppressed.
  • a support pedestal portion 21 made of an insulating material such as a resin is fixedly provided in the recess formed by the insulating portion 82 and the eyelet portion 83 of the power receiving unit 80, and a columnar shape is formed on the support pedestal portion 21.
  • the heat pipe 20 is erected so as to extend in a direction substantially parallel to the lamp axis J1.
  • the end of the heat pipe 20 opposite to the side erected on the support pedestal 21 passes through an opening provided in the front surface 178 of the large-diameter portion 171 of the case 170 and is located inside the globe 40.
  • the mounting substrate 111 of the light emitting unit 110 is fixed to the end by an adhesive or the like. Accordingly, the light emitting unit 110 is supported by the heat pipe 20 and is disposed in the globe 40 in the air.
  • the light emitting unit 110 includes an LED 12 as a semiconductor light emitting element used as a light source, a mounting substrate 111 on which the LED 12 is mounted, and a sealing body 13 that covers the LED 12 on the mounting substrate 111.
  • the light emitting unit 110 and the circuit unit 50 are electrically connected by the wiring 15 and the connector 16 arranged through the wiring hole 114 provided in the front surface 178 of the case 170.
  • a transparent substrate is used as the mounting substrate 111.
  • the transparent substrate for example, a sapphire substrate, a glass substrate, a ceramic substrate, a light-transmitting resin substrate, or the like is used. A part of the light emitted from the LED 12 to the rear side of the LED 12 passes through the mounting substrate 111 and is emitted to the rear side of the light emitting unit 110. As a result, the light distribution angle of the lamp 100 can be widened to obtain good light distribution characteristics.
  • the heat pipe 20 is made of, for example, a metal material.
  • a metal material for example, Al, Ag, Au, Ni, Rh, Pd, or an alloy made of two or more of them, or an alloy of Cu and Ag can be considered. . Since such a metal material has good thermal conductivity, the heat generated in the light emitting unit 110 is efficiently conducted to the power receiving unit 80 and radiated from the power receiving unit 80 to the lighting fixture (not shown). be able to.
  • the heat pipe 20 serves as a support member that supports the light emitting unit 110 with respect to the power receiving unit 80 and the case 170, and serves as a heat conduction member that transfers heat from the light emitting unit 110 to the power receiving unit 80. Plays both roles.
  • the heat pipe 20 is covered with an insulating resin thin film or the like. May be.
  • the circuit board 51 is arranged in a curved shape along the inner peripheral surface 171a of the case 170, similarly to the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment.
  • the area of the circuit board 51 can be increased. Therefore, even when the case 170 is reduced in size, a space for mounting the electronic component 52 and forming a wiring pattern can be secured on the circuit board 51. That is, the case 170 can be reduced in size.
  • the heat radiation of the light emitting unit 110 can be improved by conducting the heat of the light emitting unit 110 to the power receiving unit 80 by the heat pipe 20 to dissipate the heat.
  • the light emitting unit 110 is disposed in the air in the globe 40 and a transparent substrate is used for the mounting substrate 111, a part of the light emitted to the rear side of the LED 12 is emitted to the rear side of the light emitting unit 110.
  • the light distribution angle of the lamp 100 can be widened to obtain good light distribution characteristics.
  • Embodiment 3 an example in which the structure which is one embodiment of the present invention is applied to a halogen lamp type lamp will be described.
  • symbol is attached
  • FIG. 6 is a partially cutaway view showing a schematic configuration of the lamp 200 according to the third embodiment.
  • the lamp 200 includes a case 270, a light emitting unit 210, a circuit unit 250, and a cover unit 240 as main components.
  • the case 270 is made of an insulating material having thermal conductivity such as resin, and is configured by a bowl-shaped first case portion 271 and a second case portion 272.
  • the first case portion 271 and the second case portion 272 are connected to each other in the axial direction so that the two shafts substantially coincide with the lamp shaft J2.
  • the circuit unit 250 is accommodated in the internal space of the first case portion 271.
  • the circuit unit 250 is different from the circuit board 51 in the size and ratio of the fan-shaped side and the arc shape of the circuit board 251 so that the circuit unit 250 fits in the internal space of the first case portion 271.
  • the basic configuration is the same as that of the circuit unit 50 except that the arrangement of the electronic components 52 to be mounted is different.
  • the center of the bottom part of the first case part 271 extends rearward to form a protruding part 273.
  • a metal shell portion 281 is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the protruding portion 273, and a metal eyelet portion 283 is provided at the distal end portion of the protruding portion 273.
  • Each of the shell portion 281 and the eyelet portion 283 is connected to the circuit unit 250 by a wiring 53 and serves as a power supply terminal that receives supply of electric power from an external power source.
  • the second case portion 272 is formed in a bowl shape by a mounting substrate 211 as a bottom portion and a side surface portion 272b extending from the periphery of the mounting substrate 211.
  • the light emitting unit 210 includes a mounting substrate 211, an LED 12, a sealing body 13, and a lens 214.
  • the mounting substrate 211 is not the front end portion of the case 270, but the bottom portion of the second case portion 272, that is, the central portion in the front-rear direction of the case 270 that is a portion where the first case portion and the second case portion are connected.
  • the basic configuration is the same as that of the mounting board 11 except that the mounting board 11 is different from the mounting board 11 in the first embodiment.
  • the lens 214 is made of a translucent material such as resin and is provided so as to enclose the sealing body 13.
  • the light emitting unit 210 is disposed so that the optical axis of the light emitting unit 210 and the saddle axis of the second case unit 272 coincide.
  • the cover part 240 includes a front cover 241 that closes the opening of the second case part 272 and a metal fitting 242 that fixes the front cover 241 to the second case part 272.
  • a plurality of window portions 272 a that are openings are provided at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the side surface portion 272 b of the second case portion 272.
  • the lamp 200 is used by being mounted on a socket provided in a commercial facility or the like.
  • the light emitted from the light emitting part 210 is emitted as a spotlight from the opening of the second case part 272 through the front cover 241 as well as from the side face part 272b of the second case part 272 as leaked light through the window part 272a. Is done.
  • the window portions 272a are arranged in one row in the circumferential direction of the side surface portion 272b.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the window portions 272a may be arranged in two or more rows.
  • the shape of the window portion 272a is not limited to a circle or an ellipse as shown in FIG. 6, and may be a polygon such as a rhombus or a triangle, or a heart shape.
  • the size of the window portion 272a is not limited to the same size, and the size may be different. In this case, for example, when a plurality of windows are arranged as described above, the front window 272a may be larger than the rear window 272a. Thereby, a lot of light can be leaked at an angle close to the emission direction of the spotlight, and the illuminance around the main irradiation region can be further increased.
  • the window portion 272a may be a hollow through hole, but may be sealed with a translucent member such as resin, glass, ceramics, or the like. By sealing the through hole with a translucent member, foreign matter such as moisture and dust can be prevented from entering the second case portion 272.
  • the color of the translucent member may be colorless or colored. When colored, the translucent member functions as a color filter.
  • Some conventional halogen light bulbs use a dichroic filter as a reflecting mirror, and when this is turned on, the color of leakage light may be a specific color (for example, red). Therefore, by substituting the translucent member so as to reproduce this specific color, the substitutability of the lamp 200 for the halogen bulb can be further enhanced.
  • the circuit board 251 is disposed on the inner peripheral surface 271a of the first case portion 271 in the same manner as the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment and the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment. Accordingly, the area of the circuit board 251 can be increased. Thereby, even when the first case portion 271 is downsized, a space for mounting the electronic component 52 and forming a wiring pattern can be secured on the circuit board 251. That is, the first case portion 271 can be reduced in size.
  • a part of the light from the light emitting unit 210 is emitted as leaked light through the window 272a. It can produce a “feel” and a “feel”.
  • Embodiments of the present invention are not limited to bulb-type lamps and halogen lamp-type lamps, but can also be applied to straight tube fluorescent lamp-type lamps.
  • Embodiment 4 a case where the structure of one embodiment of the present invention is applied to a straight tube lamp will be described as an example.
  • symbol is attached
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 300 according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 7A is a side view of the lamp 300.
  • FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view of the lamp 300.
  • the lamp 300 is a so-called straight tube type LED lamp, and includes a light emitting unit 310, a bulb 340, a circuit unit 350, a case 370, as main components. And a power receiving unit 380.
  • FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing only the light emitting unit 310 and the circuit unit 350 with the bulb 340, the case 370, and the power receiving unit 380 removed from the lamp 300.
  • FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing only the light emitting unit 310 and the circuit unit 350 with the bulb 340, the case 370, and the power receiving unit 380 removed from the lamp 300.
  • the light emitting unit 310 includes a plurality of LEDs 312 arranged in a line along the longitudinal direction of the mounting substrate 311 on a long rectangular and flat mounting substrate 311.
  • a wiring pattern is formed of a metal thin film or the like on the main surface of the mounting substrate 311 on the side where the LEDs 312 are mounted.
  • screw holes 311 a for fixing the mounting substrate 311 to the case 370 are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the mounting substrate 311.
  • the LED 312 is an SMD (Surface Mount Device) type.
  • the LED 312 is obtained by packaging an LED as a semiconductor light emitting element and a sealing body covering the LED as one chip.
  • the light emission color of the LED, the material configuration of the sealing body, and the wavelength conversion characteristics are the same as those of the LED 12 and the sealing body 13, respectively.
  • the SMD type LED 312 is used.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and like the LED 12 in the first to third embodiments, the LED 312 is sealed on the type LED directly formed on the mounting substrate. What formed the stop 13 may be used.
  • the valve 340 is formed in a long cylindrical shape.
  • the bulb 340 is formed from a resin material such as an acrylic resin having translucency.
  • the valve 340 is not limited to a resin material, but may be a light-transmitting material, and may be formed from, for example, glass or ceramics.
  • the entire bulb 340 may not have translucency.
  • the portion located on the main emission direction side in this embodiment, the side on which the LED 312 of the mounting substrate 311 is mounted
  • the portion located on the side opposite to the main emission direction. May not have translucency.
  • a heat pipe (heat sink) or the like may be provided in a portion located on the side opposite to the main emission direction.
  • the inner peripheral surface of the bulb 340 may be subjected to light diffusion treatment with silica or the like.
  • the entire inner peripheral surface of the bulb 340 may not be subjected to light diffusion processing, and at least the inner peripheral surface of the bulb 340 located on the main emission direction side of the light emitting unit 310 is subjected to light diffusion processing. It only has to be.
  • valve 340 is not necessarily cylindrical.
  • a polygonal cylinder shape or a semi-cylindrical shape may be used, and any shape that covers at least the main emission direction side of the light emitting unit 310 may be used.
  • Case 370 includes a first case portion 371 and a second case portion 372.
  • the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 are both bottomed cylindrical members made of an insulating material such as resin.
  • the first case portion 371 includes a side wall portion 371a and a bottom portion 371b.
  • the second case portion 372 includes a side wall portion 372a and a bottom portion 372b.
  • the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 are respectively fitted to both end portions of the valve 340.
  • Side wall portions 371 a and 372 a of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 are notched in the main emission direction side portion of the opening end side portion which is the end portion on the side fitted to the bulb 340, respectively. It has become a shape.
  • the shortest length in the tube axis direction of the side wall portion 371a and the side wall portion 372a is W1, and the longest length is W2.
  • the lengths W1 and W2 are, for example, W1 is 10 mm to 29 mm and W2 is about 80 mm to 90 mm.
  • the side portions 371a and 372a have the shortest length portion (the length W1 portion) located on the emission direction side. ing.
  • the opening side end portions of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 are notched linearly obliquely with respect to the cylinder axis. It has a shape.
  • Support portions 331 and 332 to which the mounting substrate 311 is attached are formed on the inner peripheral surfaces of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 opposite to the main emission direction side, respectively.
  • Screw holes 331a and 332a which are through holes, are formed in the support portions 331 and 332, respectively. Then, in a state where the light emitting unit 310 is supported in the bulb 340 by the support portions 331 and 332, both ends of the mounting substrate 311 are fixed to the support portions 331 and 332 by screws 333, respectively.
  • the support portion 331 is formed integrally with the first case portion 371, and the support portion 332 is formed integrally with the second case portion 372, but is not limited thereto.
  • the support part may be formed as a separate member and attached to the case part.
  • the bottom portion 371b of the first case portion 371 is provided with a bar-like pin 381 in an opposing manner.
  • a rod-like pin 382 is provided opposite to the bottom portion 372 b of the second case portion 372.
  • the pins 381 and 382 constitute a power receiving unit 380.
  • the pins 381 and 382 are made of a metal such as aluminum or copper, and are connected to a pair of sockets provided in a lighting apparatus for a straight tube fluorescent lamp.
  • FIGS. 7A and 7B of the pair of pins 381, the back-side pin 381 is hidden behind the front-side pin 381 and cannot be seen, so only the front-side pin 381 is shown. .
  • the back-side pin 382 is hidden behind the near-side pin 382 and cannot be seen, so only the near-side pin 381 is shown. Therefore, in FIGS. 7A and 7B, only one pin 381 and 382 are shown, but in actuality, a total of four pins are erected, two each. Yes.
  • a rod-like pin 382 provided upright on the bottom portion 372b of the second case portion 372 is for fixing the lamp 300 to a lighting fixture or the like, and receives power from outside and supplies power to the circuit unit 350.
  • the role of supplying power is not limited to the pin 381, and any one of the pins 381 and 382 may play a role. Therefore, it is assumed that the power receiving unit 380 is configured by the pin 381 and the pin 382, and in FIG. For convenience, the reference numeral of the power receiving unit 380 is attached to the pin 381 side.
  • both the pin 381 and the pin 382 may receive power from the outside and supply power to the circuit unit.
  • the circuit unit 350 includes a first circuit unit part 350a and a second circuit unit part 350b.
  • the first circuit unit portion 350a includes a circuit board 351a and various electronic components 52 mounted on the circuit board 351a.
  • the second circuit unit portion 350b includes a circuit board 351b and various electronic components 52 mounted on the circuit board 351b.
  • FIG. 7B and FIG. 8 as well, only some of the electronic components 52 are denoted by reference numerals.
  • the circuit boards 351a and 351b are housed inside the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372, respectively, in a semi-cylindrical manner.
  • the electronic component 52 is mounted on the main surface inside the curve of the circuit boards 351a and 351b.
  • a wiring 353 led out from the circuit board 351a of the first circuit unit portion 350a is connected to a portion of the pin 381 exposed inside the first case portion 371 by a conductive bonding material such as solder. As a result, the first circuit unit 350a is electrically connected to the pin 381.
  • the first circuit unit portion 350a and the second circuit unit portion 350b are connected by a wire 354. Since the wiring 354 is arranged through the side of the mounting substrate 311 where the LED 312 is not mounted, the wiring 354 does not block the light emitted from the LED 312. In addition, the central portion 354a of the wiring 354 is a twisted line, and noise leakage to the outside due to a high-frequency current flowing through the wiring 354 can be suppressed.
  • a connector 356 is attached to the end of the wiring 355 led out from the circuit board 351b of the second circuit unit part 350b, and the connector 356 is connected to a socket 357 disposed on the mounting board 311.
  • the second circuit unit part 350b and the light emitting part 310 are electrically connected.
  • the end of the circuit board 351b on the side close to the light emitting part 310 has a shape in which the main emission direction side is cut out in the same manner as the second case part 372. Thereby, it is possible to secure a slightly large area of the mounting substrate on which the electronic component 52 is mounted or wiring is connected.
  • the circuit board 351a does not have a shape in which the main emission direction side is notched.
  • the area of the circuit boards 351a and 351b constituting part of each of the first circuit unit part 350a and the second circuit unit part 350b increases.
  • the cylindrical axis direction of the side wall portions of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 according to the size of the circuit board so that the circuit board is accommodated in the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372. It is conceivable to increase the length of.
  • the length of the lamp in the longitudinal direction is determined by the standard, if the length of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 in the cylinder axis direction is increased, the first case portion 371 in the bulb 340 is correspondingly increased.
  • the area not covered by the second case portion 372, that is, the area of the light emitting part of the lamp is reduced, and the area of the non-light emitting part is increased.
  • the area of the non-light emitting portion is increased, the appearance impression is deteriorated.
  • circuit board 351a may have a shape in which the main emission direction side is cut out in the same manner as the circuit board 351b.
  • the circuit board 351b may have a shape in which the main emission direction side is not cut out.
  • the circuit unit 350 is divided into two parts, a first circuit unit part 350a and a second circuit unit part 350b, and accommodated in the first case part 371 and the second case part 372, respectively.
  • the increase in the length in the cylinder axis direction of a case can be suppressed. That is, when the circuit unit is accommodated in one of the case portions without being divided, the length of the case portion in the cylinder axis direction increases.
  • the case portion becomes long, the non-light-emitting portion of the lamp becomes longer correspondingly, and there is a risk of deteriorating the visual impression.
  • the visual impression is further deteriorated. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance impression as described above.
  • the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the circuit unit is divided into two parts and disposed at both ends of the lamp as in the lamp 300 according to the present embodiment.
  • the size of the circuit unit is sufficiently small, or when the appearance impression is not important, all the circuit units may be arranged at one end of the lamp.
  • the area for mounting the electronic component 52 is increased by making the circuit board a curved shape along the inner peripheral surface of the case portion. be able to. Thereby, a case part can be reduced in size, ensuring the area of a circuit board required for mounting the electronic component 52. FIG.
  • the area of the circuit board is increased, such as when the number of electronic components is increased, an increase in the size of the case portion can be suppressed.
  • the heat pipe 20 serves as a heat conducting member that transfers heat from the light emitting unit 110 to the power receiving unit 80 to dissipate the heat, and the light emitting unit 110 is used as a globe. It also played a role as a support member disposed in the air 40.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the heat pipe may serve only as a heat conducting member.
  • FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 400 according to the first modification.
  • the lamp 400 includes a case 70, a light emitting unit 10, a circuit unit 50, and a globe 40 as main components.
  • the basic configuration of the lamp 400 is the same as that of the lamp 100 except that the lamp 400 is different from the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment in the following points.
  • the lamp 400 is arranged such that the light emitting unit 10 is connected to the front end portion of the large-diameter portion 71 in the same manner as the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment, instead of being disposed in the globe 40 in the air. It is different from 100.
  • the heat pipe 420 does not extend into the globe 40, and the front end of the heat pipe 420 is fixed to the back surface (rear surface) of the mounting substrate 11 with an adhesive or the like. Is different from the lamp 100. That is, in other words, the lamp 400 is different from the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment in that the heat pipe 320 is provided, and the basic configuration is the same as that of the lamp 1. be able to.
  • the manner in which the circuit unit 50 is accommodated in the large-diameter portion 71 is the same as in the first and second embodiments, and thus is the same as in the first and second embodiments.
  • the case 70 can be reduced in size.
  • the heat radiation of the light emitting unit 110 can be improved by conducting the heat of the light emitting unit 10 to the power receiving unit 80 by the heat pipe 420 to dissipate the heat.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 500 according to the second modification.
  • the basic configuration of the lamp 500 is the same as that of the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment, except that the concave portion 521 is formed on the peripheral surface of the heat pipe 520.
  • the recess 521 is formed at a position corresponding to the electronic component 52 a, and a part of the electronic component 52 a is located in the recess 521. At this time, when the electronic component 52 a comes into contact with the recessed surface of the recess 521, heat generated in the electronic component 52 a is conducted to the heat pipe 520 and is radiated to the power receiving unit 80 via the heat pipe 520. In this case, a treatment such as forming an insulating film on the recessed surface of the recessed portion 521 may be performed.
  • the electronic component 52a since a part of the electronic component 52a is located in the recess 521, the electronic component 52a contacts the recess 521 even when the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51 is detached from the bottom surface 177. It is possible to suppress the unit 50 from moving inside the case 170. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as disconnection of wiring or separation of the electronic component 52 from the circuit board 51.
  • FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 600 according to the third modification. As shown in FIG. 11, a continuous recess 621 may be formed on the outer peripheral surface of the heat pipe 620 over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction.
  • the heat generated in the electronic component 52a is transmitted from the concave portion 621 to the heat pipe 620, and is radiated from there to the power receiving unit 80. it can.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 700 according to the fourth modification.
  • the lamp 700 is different from the lamp 1 in that the mounting substrate 711 is provided as a separate member independent of the case 770.
  • the lamp 1 differs from the lamp 1 in that a projection 778 for fixing the mounting substrate 711 to the front end 773 of the large-diameter portion 771 protrudes in the direction toward the lamp axis J1.
  • the lamp 700 has the same basic configuration as the lamp 1 except for the differences in the above two points.
  • the large diameter portion 771, the small diameter portion 772, the front end portion 773, the groove portion 774, the rear opening 775, and the bottom surface 777 of the lamp 700 are respectively the large diameter portion 71, the small diameter portion 72, and the front end portion 73 in the lamp 1. , Corresponding to the groove 74, the rear opening 75, and the bottom surface 77.
  • the mounting substrate 711, the LED 12, and the sealing body 13 constitute a light emitting unit 710.
  • the mounting substrate 711 is formed as a separate member from the case 770, and therefore, the case 770 is attached before the mounting substrate 711 is attached to the protrusion 778 of the case 770.
  • the circuit unit 50 can be inserted into the large diameter portion 771 from the front opening 776. Since the front opening 776 is larger than the rear opening 775, the circuit unit 50 can be easily inserted into and fixed to the case 770. Moreover, since the circuit unit 50 can be inserted into the case 770 without being rounded down, the risk of damage to the electronic component 52 can be reduced. Furthermore, since the circuit unit 50 does not have to be rounded down, the mounting density of electronic components on the circuit board 51 can be increased, which is advantageous for downsizing.
  • FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 800 according to the fifth modification.
  • a groove portion 877a for fixing the rear side end portion 51c of the circuit board 51 is formed on the bottom surface 877 of the case 870. Since the mounting substrate 711 is a separate member from the case 870, the circuit unit 50 can be inserted into the case 870 from the front opening 876 of the case 870 before the mounting substrate 711 is attached to the case 870. At that time, the circuit unit 50 can be fixed to the case 870 by inserting the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51 into the groove 877a.
  • the rear side end portion 51c of the circuit board 51 may be fitted to fix the circuit unit 50 inside the large diameter portion 871. Then, after mounting an adhesive or the like on the upper surface of the protruding portion 878, the mounting substrate 711 is placed, the mounting substrate 711 is fixedly attached to the case 870, and the front opening 876 is closed by the mounting substrate 711.
  • the basic configuration of the case 870 is the same as that of the case 770 except that the groove 877a is formed.
  • the large diameter portion 871, the small diameter portion 872, the front side end portion 873, the groove portion 874, the rear side opening 875, the bottom surface 877, and the projection portion 878 in the lamp 800 are respectively the large diameter portion 771, the small diameter portion 772, and the front portion. It corresponds to the side end 773, the groove 774, the rear side opening 775, the bottom 777, and the protrusion 778.
  • ⁇ Modification 6> Moreover, in the modification 5, the structure which fitted and fixed the circuit board in the groove part provided in the bottom face of the large diameter part was demonstrated.
  • the location where the groove is provided is not limited to this, and may be any location as long as it is a surface inside the large diameter portion.
  • a circuit unit is formed by forming a groove in the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) on the inner peripheral surface of the large-diameter portion, and press-fitting a side end portion (a portion corresponding to a fan-shaped side) of the circuit board 51 into the groove. 50 may be fixed inside the large diameter portion.
  • FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 900 according to Modification 7.
  • the outer peripheral surface of the circuit board 951 is affixed to the inner peripheral surface 954 b of the cylindrical tubular member 954, and the rear side end portion 954 c of the cylindrical member 954 is formed on the bottom surface 877 of the case 870.
  • the groove portion 877a is fitted and fixed.
  • the circuit unit 950 is different from the circuit board 51 in that the circuit board 951 is rectangular when deployed in a plane so that the circuit board 951 fits the inner peripheral surface 954b of the cylindrical tubular member 954.
  • the basic configuration is the same as that of the circuit unit 50.
  • FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 1000 according to Modification 8. As shown in the figure, a part of the electronic component 52 is mounted on the outer peripheral surface 1051 a of the circuit board 1051. That is, the electronic component 52 is mounted on both the outer peripheral surface 1051a and the inner peripheral surface 1051b of the circuit board 1051.
  • the relatively tall electronic component 52a is mounted on the inner peripheral surface 1051b of the circuit board 1051, and the relatively short electronic component 52 is mounted on the outer peripheral surface 1051a.
  • the circuit board 1051 can be disposed closer to the inner peripheral surface 1071a of the large-diameter portion 1071 of the case 1070, and the area of the circuit board 1051 can be made as large as possible.
  • the basic configuration of the case 1070 in the present modified example is the same as that of the case 770 of the lamp 700 according to the modified example 4 except that the length in the lamp axis J1 direction is relatively short.
  • the large-diameter portion 1071, the small-diameter portion 1072, the front-side end portion 1073, the rear-side opening 1075, the front-side opening 1076, the bottom surface 1077, and the protrusion 1078 in the case 1070 are the large-diameter portion 771 and the small-diameter portion 772 in the lamp 700, respectively.
  • FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 1100 according to Modification 9.
  • the electronic component 52 a is mounted on the outer peripheral surface 1151 a of the circuit board 1151.
  • the electronic component 52a may be disposed on the front side where the large-diameter portion 1071 has a large inner diameter. Since the electronic component 52a is disposed on the front side, the circuit board 1151 has a shape with a smaller diameter toward the front side in a state where the circuit board 1151 is curved and accommodated inside the large diameter portion 1071.
  • the circuit board 1151 In a state where the circuit board 1151 is developed in a plane, it has a fan-like shape like the circuit board 51 shown in FIG. 4, and inside the case, the shorter one of the arcs of the fan is in the front side. Contained. Further, all of the relatively short electronic components 52 may be mounted on the inner peripheral surface 1151b of the circuit board 1151, or a part thereof may be mounted on the outer peripheral surface 1151a.
  • the circuit unit is fixed inside the large-diameter portion 1071 by providing a protrusion for locking the electronic component 52 and the circuit board 51 on the inner peripheral surface 1071a of the large-diameter portion 1071. May be.
  • the opposing sides of the curved circuit board may be connected to form a cylindrical shape.
  • the modification 11 a case where a circuit unit that is formed in a cylindrical shape by connecting two opposite sides of a circuit board is applied to a straight tube LED lamp will be described as an example.
  • FIG. 17 is a view showing a lamp 1200 according to the eleventh modification.
  • FIG. 17A is a side view of the lamp 1200
  • FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the lamp 1200.
  • the first case portion 1271 includes a bottomed cylindrical portion 1271a and a bottomless cylindrical portion 1271b
  • the second case portion 1272 includes a bottomed cylindrical portion 1272a and a bottomless cylindrical portion 1272b. It consists of and.
  • the first case unit 1271 accommodates a first circuit unit unit 1250a in which various electronic components 52 are mounted on the inner peripheral surface of a cylindrical circuit board 1251a.
  • the second case unit 1272 houses a second circuit unit unit 1250b in which various electronic components 52 are mounted on the inner peripheral surface of a cylindrical circuit board 1251b.
  • the first circuit unit portion 1250a and the second circuit unit portion 1250b constitute a circuit unit 1250.
  • the movement of the end portion of the circuit board 1251a on the light emitting unit 310 side in the direction of approaching the light emitting unit 310 is restricted by the support unit 1231. Further, the movement of the end portion of the circuit board 1251b on the light emitting unit 310 side in the direction of approaching the light emitting unit 310 is restricted by the support unit 1232.
  • the inner diameter of the internal space of the first case portion 1271 corresponds to the outer diameter of the circuit board 1251a.
  • the inner diameter of the internal space of the second case portion 1272 corresponds to the outer diameter of the circuit board 1251b.
  • the first circuit unit portion 1250a and the second circuit unit portion 1250b are It is easy to accommodate the first case portion 1271 and the second case portion 1272 respectively. Specifically, after the first circuit unit portion 1250a is inserted into the bottomless cylindrical portion 1271b, the bottomed cylindrical portion 1271a is covered and the bottomed cylindrical portion 1271a is attached to the bottomless cylindrical portion 1271b. Thus, the first circuit unit portion 1250a is accommodated in the first case portion 1271.
  • Attachment of the bottomed cylindrical portion 1271a to the bottomless cylindrical portion 1271b may be performed using an adhesive, or an engagement structure such as a claw-shaped member may be used.
  • the housing of the second circuit unit portion 1250b in the second case portion 1272 and the attachment of the bottomed tubular portion 1272a to the bottomless tubular portion 1272b are performed in the same manner as described above.
  • circuit board may be fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the case using an adhesive or an adhesive.
  • ⁇ Modification 12> In the case where one aspect of the present invention is applied to a straight tube lamp like the lamp 300 according to the fourth embodiment and the lamp 1200 according to the modification 11, the cutouts of the first case portion and the second case portion are side surfaces. It may not be cut out linearly in view.
  • FIG. 18 is a side view of a lamp 1300 according to Modification 12. As shown in the figure, in the lamp 1300, the main emission direction side portions of the side surfaces of the first case portion 1371 and the second case portion 1372 are cut out in a curved manner. The first case portion 1371 and the second case portion 1372 form a case 1370.
  • the mounting substrate 111 has a flat plate shape, but is not limited thereto.
  • FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1400 according to Modification 13.
  • the lamp 1400 is integrally formed with a base portion 1422 having a quadrangular pyramid shape at the front end portion of the heat pipe 1420. Further, a light emitting unit 1410 in which an LED 312 is mounted on a mounting substrate 1411 is attached to the upper surface and side surfaces of the base unit 1422.
  • the basic configuration of the lamp 1400 is the same as that of the lamp 100 except that the lamp 1400 is different from the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment in the above two points.
  • the heat pipe 1420 and the base part 1422 serve as a support member that supports the light emitting part 1410 in the globe 40.
  • the heat pipe 1420 is a support main body portion that is fixed to the power receiving unit 80.
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 1500 according to Modification Example 14.
  • the base portion 1522 may be formed as a separate member from the heat pipe 20. Further, like the lamp 1500, the LED 312 may be directly mounted on the base portion 1522 instead of on the mounting substrate.
  • the base portion 1522 is preferably formed from a material such as resin or ceramic.
  • a wiring pattern (not shown) is also directly formed on the base portion 1522.
  • the base portion 1522 also serves as a mounting substrate in addition to the role as a support member, the light emitting portion 1510 is configured by the LED 312 and the base portion 1522. Can be seen as doing. Further, the base portion 1522 may be formed using a heat conductive resin or the like, and the base portion 1522 may further function as a heat conductive member.
  • FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1600 according to Modification 15.
  • the base portion 1622 may have an inverted quadrangular pyramid shape.
  • the light from the LED 312 mounted on the side surface of the base portion 1622 is emitted to the rear side of the lamp 1600. It is possible to improve the light distribution characteristics.
  • the LED 312 is directly mounted on the surface of the base portion 1622. Accordingly, the base portion 1622 also functions as a mounting substrate, and it can be considered that the light emitting portion 1610 is configured by the LED 312 and the base portion 1622.
  • the base portion 1622 is formed of a material such as resin or ceramic, and the heat pipe 1620 and the base portion 1622 are integrally formed, the heat pipe 1620 is also made of resin, ceramic, or the like. Manufacturing from the material is easy. In that case, a material having good thermal conductivity may be used.
  • the base portion 1622 is integrally formed at the front end portion of the heat pipe 1620.
  • the base portion 1622 is not limited to this and is attached to the heat pipe 1620 as a separate member. It may be.
  • the LED 312 is directly mounted on the surface of the base portion 1622.
  • the present invention is not limited to this.
  • a mounting board made of a flexible board or the like on which LEDs are mounted may be attached to the surface of the base portion 1622.
  • ⁇ Modification 16> In the case where the LED has a light emitting part mounted directly or via a mounting substrate on the surface of the base part having a quadrangular pyramid shape like the lamps 1400, 1500, 1600 according to the modified examples 13, 14, 15 Since the LED mounted on the side surface of the pedestal is close to the globe, it can be considered that when the user looks at the lamp from the side, the light from the LED appears glaring. In order to suppress such glare, for example, the thickness of the glove may be changed.
  • FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1700 according to Modification 16.
  • the thickness of the side portion 1743 that is a portion close to the LED 312 a mounted on the side surface 1422 a of the base portion 1422 of the globe 1740 is increased, and the top surface portion 1744 is increased.
  • the thickness decreases as it goes to. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 312a to the side is weakened or diffused while passing through the side portion 1743 of the globe 1740, thereby reducing glare.
  • the LED 312a is given a different reference for the sake of convenience in order to distinguish the LED mounted on the side surface 1422a from the other LEDs, and the LED 312 and the LED 312a are mounted on the base portion. Except for the difference in the upper position, it is exactly the same. The same applies to the modified examples 17 and 18 below.
  • a light diffusion process may be performed on the inner surface of the side portion of the globe.
  • FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1800 according to Modification 17.
  • a light diffusion process is performed on the side inner surface 1843a that is the inner surface of the side portion 1843.
  • the side inner surface 1843a is subjected to so-called frost processing in which a large number of minute depressions (or irregularities) are formed.
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1900 according to Modification 18.
  • a light diffusion layer 1944 may be formed on the side inner surface 43 a of the side portion 43 of the globe 40.
  • the light diffusion layer 1944 may be formed, for example, by applying a turbid liquid in which a colorless transparent polymer is made turbid with silica or the like to the side inner surface 43a.
  • a film-like member having translucency, light diffusibility, and flexibility may be attached to the side inner surface 43a.
  • a translucent cylindrical member having a light diffusion treatment applied to the surface or the inside may be disposed inside the side portion 43 of the globe 40.
  • the mounting substrate 1411 is made of a flexible material such as a flexible substrate, but is not limited thereto.
  • the mounting substrate may be formed from a material such as resin or ceramic that does not have flexibility. Further, the mounting substrate may be configured by combining a plurality of parts.
  • FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 2000 according to Modification 20.
  • the lamp 2000 is different from the lamp 700 according to the modification 4 in that a circular or partly C-shaped groove 2011a is formed on the back surface of the mounting substrate 2011. Except for the difference from the lamp 700 in the above points, the lamp 2000 has the same basic configuration as the lamp 700.
  • the front end 51d of the circuit board 51 is press-fitted into the groove 2011a provided on the back surface of the mounting board 2011, whereby the circuit unit 50 is fixed inside the large-diameter part 771. ing. In addition, after applying adhesive etc. inside the groove part 2011a, the front side end part 51d may be fitted and the circuit unit 50 may be fixed inside the large diameter part 771.
  • the light emitting unit 2010 of the lamp 2000 according to this modification has the same configuration as the light emitting unit 710 of the lamp 700 according to modification 4 except that a groove 2011a is formed on the back surface of the mounting substrate 2011. Have.
  • a light emitting unit 2010 is configured by the mounting substrate 2011, the LED 12, and the sealing body 13.
  • both end portions on the rear side may be fixed by groove portions.
  • the circuit unit is stored in advance. Since it is possible to place the circuit unit in a large-diameter part or to arrange a circuit unit divided into multiple parts in a predetermined shape within the large-diameter part, the degree of freedom in circuit board material and shape, and circuit unit shape and arrangement There is an advantage that it can be designed large.
  • FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view of the lamp 2100 and corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ in FIG.
  • the circuit unit 2150 does not need to be inserted into the large-diameter portion 71 from the rear side opening 75 in a state of being rounded and reduced like the circuit unit 50 in the first embodiment, as a material used for the circuit board 2151,
  • the material is not limited to a flexible material used for a flexible substrate such as polyimide, and a material having rigidity such as a resin or ceramic may be used as long as it is an insulating material.
  • a wiring pattern is formed on a flat circuit board and an electronic component is mounted, and then the two opposite sides are curved using an adhesive or the like. To form a cylindrical shape.
  • the circuit board 2151 since the circuit board 2151 has a cylindrical shape with a closed peripheral surface, unlike the circuit board 51 in the first embodiment, the force to spread by its own elastic force does not work. Therefore, as a fixing method inside the large-diameter portion 771 of the circuit unit 2150, an adhesive tape is applied to the bottom surface 777 of the large-diameter portion 771, and the rear side end portion of the circuit board 2151 is fixed, or an adhesive is used to The side end portion may be fixed to the bottom surface 777.
  • a circular groove portion is provided on the bottom surface 777, and the rear end portion of the circuit board 2151 is fitted into the groove portion so that the circuit unit 2150 has a large diameter portion. 771 may be fixed inside.
  • a groove is provided on the back surface of the mounting substrate, and the front end of the circuit board 2151 is fitted into the groove so that the circuit unit 2150 has a large diameter portion. 771 may be fixed inside.
  • the circuit board 2251 has a plurality of circuit boards 2251 along the inner peripheral surface 771a of the large-diameter portion 771. It is good also as a structure which is arrange
  • FIG. FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the lamp 2200 and corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ in FIG.
  • the circuit boards 2251 are connected to each other by wiring 2254.
  • the electronic components 52 mounted on the separate circuit boards 2251 are electrically connected to each other through the wiring 2254, so that the electronic components 52 can operate in cooperation with each other.
  • the fixing method of the circuit unit 2250 in the large-diameter portion 771 in the lamp 2200 according to the modified example 22 it may be fixed using an adhesive tape, an adhesive, a groove or the like.
  • each circuit board 2251 is not limited to the arc shape as shown in FIG. 27 as viewed from the front side along the lamp axis J1, but is linear or bent at one or more places. It may be. In the case of a shape bent at a plurality of locations, it is preferable to bend in a direction protruding outward (side toward the inner peripheral surface 771a) at all the bent locations.
  • circuit boards 2251 having different shapes may be used in combination.
  • FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view of the lamp 2300 and corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ in FIG.
  • the member used for the circuit board 2351 may be a flexible member such as a flexible substrate, or may be a rigid member such as a resin or ceramic as long as it is an insulating member.
  • the circuit unit 2350 may be fixed inside the large-diameter portion 771 by using an adhesive tape, an adhesive, a groove, or the like.
  • the circuit board 2351 When a member having flexibility is used, although it depends on the degree of bending, the circuit board 2351 usually tries to spread by its own elastic force even if it is bent. Therefore, like the circuit unit 50 in the first embodiment, The circuit unit 2350 is held inside the large-diameter portion 771 by the frictional force between the outer peripheral surface 2351a of the circuit board 2351 and the inner peripheral surface 771a of the large-diameter portion 771. Also in this case, of course, the circuit unit 2350 may be fixed using an adhesive tape, an adhesive, a groove or the like.
  • the light emitting unit 110 using a transparent substrate as the mounting substrate 111 is disposed in the air in the globe 40, and a part of the light emitted to the rear side of the LED 12 passes through the mounting substrate 111.
  • the light transmission characteristics were improved by transmitting and illuminating the rear side of the globe 40.
  • the configuration for improving the light distribution characteristics is not limited to this, and the following modifications may be considered.
  • FIG. 29 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2400 according to Modification 24.
  • FIG. FIG. 30 is a partially cutaway cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2400 according to Modification Example 24.
  • the lamp 2400 is supported so that the light emitting portion 2410 is disposed in the globe 40 by the support 2420 attached on the front surface 2478 of the large diameter portion 2471 of the case 2470.
  • the lamp 2400 includes an optical member 2490 that transmits part of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 2410 and reflects part of the light backward.
  • the support 2420 is a heat sink made of aluminum or the like, for example, and supports the light emitting unit 2410 and also improves the heat dissipation of the light emitting unit 2410.
  • the optical member 2490 is a beam splitter and has a bottomed cylindrical shape including a substantially cylindrical main body portion 2491 that is open on both sides and a substantially annular mounting portion 2492 that closes the rear-side opening of the main body portion 2491.
  • the outer diameter of the front end portion of the main body portion 2491 (the maximum outer diameter of the main body portion 2491) is large enough to cover the LED 12 and the sealing body 13.
  • the optical member 2490 is positioned at a position centered on the lamp axis J1, and is fixed to the mounting substrate 2411 and the support 2420 with screws 3.
  • the optical member 2490 is made of a translucent material, and the outer peripheral surface 2491a of the main body portion 2491 is subjected to a mirror surface treatment.
  • resin materials such as a polycarbonate, glass, a ceramic, etc. can be considered, for example.
  • a reflective film such as a metal thin film or a dielectric multilayer film is formed by a method such as a thermal evaporation method, an electron beam evaporation method, a sputtering method, or a plating method. Can be considered.
  • a part of the main emitted light emitted from the LED 12 and incident on the outer peripheral surface 2491a of the main body 2491 is reflected obliquely rearward from the mounting substrate 2411 by the outer peripheral surface 2491a (optical path L1).
  • the other part passes through the main body 2491 and travels forward (optical path L3).
  • the lamp 2400 includes a main body 2491 that directs a part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 obliquely rearward away from the mounting substrate 2411. Therefore, the light distribution characteristic is good even when the irradiation angle of the LED 12 is narrow. Further, the main body 2491 not only reflects a part of the main emitted light but also transmits the other part forward, so that the shadow by the optical member 2490 hardly occurs, and the lamp 2400 can be viewed from the front when it is lit. The design properties are good.
  • the outer peripheral surface 2491a is such that the reflectance of the optical member 2490 (the reflectance of the outer peripheral surface 2491a) is 50% and the transmittance of the optical member 2490 (the transmittance of the outer peripheral surface 2491a) is 50%.
  • the mirror finish is applied.
  • the reflectance is preferably 50% or more.
  • the transmittance is preferably 40% or more.
  • the reflectance and transmittance do not need to be uniform over the entire outer peripheral surface 2491a, and may be configured such that they vary depending on the region.
  • the basic structure of the lamp 2400 according to the modified example 24 is the same as that of the case 70 except that the front surface 2478 of the case 2470 is not a mounting substrate, and includes a large diameter portion 2471 and the like.
  • a wiring hole 2414 that is a through hole is formed in the front surface 2478.
  • the wiring hole 2414 corresponds to the wiring hole 14 in the lamp 1.
  • FIG. 31 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2500 according to Modification 25.
  • FIG. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2500 according to Modification Example 25.
  • the lamp 2500 according to the modified example 25 is the lamp according to the modified example 24 in that the optical member 2590 is a reflecting mirror and an opening 2594 is provided in the main body 2591 thereof. Different from 2400. Other points are basically the same as those of the lamp 2400 according to the modified example 24.
  • the optical member 2590 has, for example, a bottomed cylindrical shape including the main body portion 2591 and the attachment portion 2592, which is the same shape as the optical member 2490 according to the modified example 24 except that the opening 2594 is provided.
  • the outer diameter of the front end portion of the main body portion 2591 (the maximum outer diameter of the main body portion 2591) is large enough to cover the LED 12 and the sealing body 13.
  • the optical member 2590 is positioned at a position centering on the lamp axis J1, and is fixed to the mounting substrate 2411 and the support 2420 with the screw 3.
  • the support 2420 is a heat sink and supports the light emitting unit 2410 and also serves to enhance the heat dissipation of the light emitting unit 2410.
  • the main body 2591 is provided with a plurality of openings 2594 that are elongated along the circumferential direction of the main body 2591.
  • each opening 2594 is a substantially arc-shaped slit that is obtained by dividing an annular ring around the cylinder axis of the main body 2591 into four equal parts, and is formed by four substantially arc-shaped slits.
  • a substantially annular slit with a concentric circle about the cylinder axis is provided. Since the opening 2594 is provided along the circumferential direction of the main body 2591, positioning of the opening 2594 and the sealing body 13 in the circumferential direction is easy.
  • the sealing body 13 of the light emitting unit 2410 is partially exposed from each opening 2594 when viewed from the front side along the lamp axis J1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32, a part of the main emitted light from the LED 12 is reflected by the outer peripheral surface 2591a and heads obliquely backward avoiding the mounting substrate 2411 (optical path L4), but the main emitted light from the LED 12 The other part passes through the opening 2594 and leaks forward (optical path L5).
  • the lamp 2500 includes an optical member 2590 that directs a part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 obliquely backward avoiding the mounting substrate 2411. Therefore, the light distribution characteristic is good even when the irradiation angle of the LED 12 is narrow. Further, since the optical member 2590 is provided with an opening 2594 that leaks the other part of the main emitted light forward, the optical member 2590 is less likely to be shaded by the optical member 2590, and when the lamp 2500 is viewed from the front during lighting. Good designability.
  • the shape, size, number, and arrangement of the opening 2594 are not necessarily limited to the above, and are arbitrary.
  • the opening 2594 is not limited to the slit as in the present modification, and any opening that can leak the other part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 forward, such as a hole or a notch, may be used.
  • the opening 2594 is a through-hole and nothing is fitted therein.
  • the opening 2594 may have a configuration in which light leaks forward without being configured in this way.
  • a translucent member may be fitted into all or a part of 2594, and light may leak forward through the translucent member.
  • FIG. 33 is a partially cutaway cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2600 according to Modification 26.
  • the mounting substrate 2611 of the light emitting unit 2610 is a transparent substrate
  • the support 2620 that supports the light emitting unit 2610 with respect to the front surface 2478 is a light guide member
  • the optical member Is different from the lamp 2400 according to Modification Example 24 and the lamp 2500 according to Modification Example 25.
  • the support 2620 is made of a light-transmitting member such as a resin such as acrylic or glass.
  • a resin such as acrylic or glass.
  • the diameter of the front end surface to which the mounting board 2611 is attached is substantially equal to the diameter of the mounting board 2611, and the front to the rear. It has a substantially cylindrical shape (inverted truncated cone shape) that has a diameter reduced toward.
  • Light emitted from the LED 12 of the light emitting unit 2610 to the rear side passes through the mounting substrate 2611 that is a transparent substrate and enters the support 2626 that is a light guide member, and from the side surface (circumferential surface) of the support 2620 to the outside. And the rear side of the globe 40 is illuminated. Thereby, a favorable light distribution characteristic can be obtained even when the irradiation angle of the LED 12 is narrow.
  • the shape of the support 2620 is not limited to the substantially cylindrical shape having a diameter reduced from the front to the rear as described above.
  • a cylindrical shape whose diameter does not change from the front to the rear may be used, and the shape is not limited to a cylindrical shape, and may be a polygonal column such as a pentagonal column or a hexagonal column.
  • a dome-shaped space may be provided inside the support 2620, and the light emitted from the LED 12 to the rear side and incident on the support tool 2620 can be emitted to the rear side of the globe 40. Any shape can be used.
  • FIG. 34 is a partially cutaway cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2700 according to Modification 27.
  • the lamp 2700 according to the modification 27 is different from the lamp 2600 according to the modification 26 in that the support 2720 has a heat sink 2721 therein.
  • the support 2720 made of a light guide member has a cylindrical through hole at the center, and a cylindrical heat sink 2721 is inserted into the through hole.
  • the heat sink 2721 is made of, for example, a metal such as aluminum, and the front surface thereof is attached to the back surface, which is the rear main surface of the mounting substrate 2611 that is a transparent substrate.
  • Light emitted from the LED 12 of the light emitting unit 2610 to the rear side is transmitted through the mounting substrate 2611 that is a transparent substrate and enters the support 2720 that is a light guide member, and from the side surface (circumferential surface) of the support 2720 to the outside. And the rear side of the globe 40 is illuminated. Thereby, a favorable light distribution characteristic can be obtained even when the irradiation angle of the LED 12 is narrow.
  • the heat dissipation of the light emitting portion 2610 can be enhanced by the heat sink 2721.
  • the shape of the heat sink 2721 is not limited to the cylindrical shape as described above, and may be, for example, a polygonal column.
  • the heat sink 2721 may have a shape in which a cylinder protrudes from the center of the disk, and the cylinder may be inserted into the through hole of the support 2720.
  • the disk portion of the heat sink may be attached on the front surface 2478 (front side).
  • a through hole is provided in the center of the front surface 2478 so that the cylindrical portion of the heat sink is inserted into the through hole from the back surface side (rear side) of the front surface 2478 and protrudes from the through hole of the front surface 2478.
  • a support 2720 may be fitted.
  • the disk portion of the heat sink may be fixed to the back surface of the front surface 2478 using an adhesive or the like.
  • another member such as an engaging claw may be provided to connect the disk portion to the front surface 2478 or the large diameter portion 2471. You may fix to the surrounding surface.
  • FIG. 35 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2800 according to Modification 28.
  • FIG. FIG. 36 is a partially cutaway cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a main part of the lamp 2800.
  • FIG. 37 is a plan view of the lamp 2800 with the globe 40 removed, as viewed from the front side.
  • the optical member 2890 includes a support column 2895 erected at the center of the mounting substrate 11 and a star-shaped member 2891 attached to the front end of the support column 2895.
  • the star-shaped member 2891 is made of a light-transmitting member such as glass or acrylic, and when viewed in plan, as shown in FIG. 37, eight rectangular blades extend radially from the center at substantially equal intervals. It has the shape of a star or asterisk.
  • the sealing body 13 of the light emitting unit 10 is partially exposed from the gap 2894 between the blades when viewed from the front side along the lamp axis J1. Further, the front surface (front side main surface) and / or the back surface (rear side main surface) of the star-shaped member 2891 is frosted.
  • a part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 passes forward through the gap 2894 (optical path L6), and the remaining part is diffused and reflected by the star-shaped member 2891. A part of the light is reflected obliquely backward avoiding the mounting substrate 11 (optical path L7).
  • FIG. 36 a cross-section is displayed at the central portion where the wings of the star-shaped member 2891 overlap, but the wings do not overlap and a gap 2894 is formed outside.
  • the lamp 2800 according to the modified example 28 includes the optical member 2890 that diffuses and reflects a part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 obliquely rearward away from the mounting substrate 11.
  • the light distribution characteristics are good even when N is narrow.
  • the optical member 2890 is provided with a gap 2894 that allows other part of the main emitted light to pass forward, shadows due to the optical member 2890 hardly occur, and when the lamp 2800 is viewed from the front during lighting. Good designability.
  • the shape and number of the blades of the star-shaped member 2891 and the shape of the gap are not necessarily limited to the above, and are arbitrary.
  • the star-shaped member 2891 and the support column 2895 may be integrally formed.
  • the blades of the star-shaped member 2891 may have a shape whose cross section is curved like the cross section of the optical member 2490 shown in FIG.
  • the back surface of the blades of the star-shaped member 2891 is mirror-finished, and like the optical member 2490, a part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 is transmitted to the front side, and the remaining part is mounted on the mounting substrate. You may make it reflect in the diagonally backward which avoided 11.
  • the star-shaped member 2891 may be provided with a frosting process in a star shape (asterisk shape) on the surface of a disk made of a light-transmitting member such as glass without providing a blade or a gap.
  • an inclined surface having an angle for reflecting the emitted light from the LED 12 to an oblique rear side avoiding the mounting substrate 11 is formed on the back surface of the star-shaped member 2891, and the inclined surface is mirror-finished. May be applied.
  • the inclined surface may be formed over almost the entire surface of the blade, one for each blade, or a large number of fine inclined surfaces may be formed on each blade.
  • the angle of the inclined surface and the direction of inclination formed on each blade may be aligned, but by combining the inclined surfaces with different angles and inclination directions, the light diffusibility is improved and the lamp is turned on at the time of lighting. Since unevenness in brightness is less likely to occur on the back side of the globe 40 of 2800, better design properties can be realized.
  • ⁇ Modification 29> although the case was formed from resin, it is not restricted to this.
  • a metal or ceramic may be used in addition to the resin.
  • an insulating film coating may be applied to the inner peripheral surface of the case (larger diameter inner peripheral surface).
  • the base part is a quadrangular pyramid, but the invention is not limited to this.
  • the base part may be another polygonal frustum or a truncated cone.
  • the base part may be a rectangular parallelepiped, a rectangular parallelepiped, or a polyhedron.
  • the semiconductor light emitting element is not limited to the LED.
  • the semiconductor light emitting element may be, for example, an LD (laser diode) or an EL element (electric luminescence element).
  • a heat conductive member may be arranged between the circuit board and the case, and the heat generated in the circuit unit may be more actively conducted to the case and radiated from the case to the outside through the base.
  • a heat conductive member is applied to the structure of the lamp 700 according to the modification 4 shown in FIG. 12 will be described below with reference to the drawings.
  • FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 2900 according to Modification 33.
  • FIG. As shown in the drawing, in the lamp 2900, a heat conductive member 2960 is disposed between the outer peripheral surface 51 a of the circuit board 51 and the inner peripheral surface 771 a of the large diameter portion 771 of the case 770.
  • the basic structure of the lamp 2900 is the same as that of the lamp 700 according to the modification 4 except that the heat conductive member 2960 is provided.
  • the heat conductive member 2960 for example, a heat conductive resin can be used.
  • the circuit unit 50 after applying paste-like thermally conductive resin to the inner peripheral surface 771a, the circuit unit 50 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 771.
  • the circuit board 51 spreads by its own elastic force, so that the outer peripheral surface 51a of the circuit board 51 is in close contact with the thermally conductive resin.
  • the heat conductive resin is solidified to form a heat conductive member 2960.
  • the thermally conductive member 2960 plays a role of an adhesive that fixes the circuit board 51 to the large diameter portion 771 in addition to the role of conducting the heat generated in the circuit unit 50 to the case 770.
  • the effect of stably holding the circuit unit 50 by holding the shape of the circuit board 51 can be obtained.
  • the thermal load received by the various electronic components 52 and physical damage due to vibration or the like can be reduced, which contributes to a longer life.
  • a heat conductive adhesive was applied to both surfaces of a sheet made of a heat conductive material.
  • An adhesive sheet may be used.
  • a heat conductive material forming the sheet a heat conductive resin, metal, ceramic, or the like can be used.
  • the mounting substrate 711 is a separate member independent of the case 770. Therefore, the heat conductive resin can be easily applied to the inner peripheral surface 771a of the large diameter portion 771 in a state where the mounting substrate 711 is removed from the case 770.
  • the thermally conductive resin is applied in a configuration in which the mounting substrate and the case are integrally formed as in the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.
  • a method of applying a heat conductive resin by inserting a nozzle or the like for applying a resin into the large-diameter portion 71 can be considered.
  • FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional view of a lamp 3000 according to the modified example 34. As shown in the figure, in the lamp 3000, a portion of the outer peripheral surface 51a of the circuit board 51 corresponding to a location where the electronic component 52 is mounted (a portion on the back side of the location where the electronic component 52 is mounted). Only) is provided with a heat conductive member 3060.
  • the basic structure of the lamp 3000 is the same as that of the lamp 700 according to the modification 4 except that the heat conductive member 3060 is provided.
  • the heat generated in the electronic component 52 can be conducted to the case 770 via the heat conductive member 3060, so that the heat dissipation of the circuit unit 50 can be improved.
  • the heat conductive member 3060 also functions as an adhesive in the same manner as the heat conductive member 2960 of the modified example 33.
  • the circuit unit 50 can be stably held. As a result, thermal damage received by various electronic components and physical damage due to vibration or the like can be reduced, which contributes to a longer life.
  • the usage-amount of a heat conductive member is few compared with the lamp
  • the mounting substrate 711 is a separate member independent of the case 770. Therefore, the case 770 in which the mounting substrate 711 is removed from the circuit unit 50 in a state where the heat conductive resin is applied to the portion corresponding to the portion where the electronic component is mounted on the outer peripheral surface 51a of the circuit board 51. Can be easily inserted into the large-diameter portion 771. When the circuit board 51 spreads by its own elastic force, the heat conductive resin is pressed against the inner peripheral surface 771a of the large diameter portion 771 and solidifies as it is to become the heat conductive member 3060.
  • thermoly conductive member 3060 an adhesive sheet in which an adhesive having thermal conductivity is applied to both surfaces of a sheet made of a thermally conductive material may be used.
  • a heat conductive material forming the sheet a heat conductive resin, metal, ceramic, or the like can be used.
  • ⁇ Modification 35> In the modification 33 and the modification 34, the configuration has been described in which a heat conductive member is disposed between the outer peripheral surface of the circuit board and the inner peripheral surface of the large-diameter portion to improve the heat dissipation of the circuit unit.
  • the structure which improves the heat dissipation of a circuit unit is not restricted to this.
  • the circuit board and the heat pipe may be thermally coupled using a heat conductive member.
  • a heat conductive member is applied to the configuration of the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment having a heat pipe will be described below with reference to the drawings.
  • FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 3100 according to Modification 35.
  • the heat conductive member 3160 is filled up to the inside of the small diameter portion 172 of the case 170 and the rear side end portion of the large diameter portion 171 beyond the bottom surface 177.
  • the basic configuration of the lamp 3100 is the same as that of the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment except that the lamp 3100 includes a heat conductive member 3160.
  • the heat conductive member 3160 reaches the rear side end portion 51 c of the circuit board 51, and the bottom portion 20 a that is the rear side portion of the heat pipe 20 is in the heat conductive member 3160. Buried in Accordingly, the rear side end portion 51 c of the circuit board 51 and the bottom portion 20 a of the heat pipe 20 are thermally connected by the heat conductive member 3160. Thereby, the heat generated in the electronic component 52 is transmitted from the rear side end portion 51c of the circuit board 51 to the heat pipe 20 via the heat conductive member 3160, and from the heat pipe 20 via the support base portion 21 and the power receiving portion 80. To dissipate heat to the outside.
  • a heat conductive resin can be used as the heat conductive member 3160.
  • the following method can be considered. After the circuit unit 50 is inserted into the large diameter portion 171 from the rear opening 175, the power receiving unit 80 is fitted to the small diameter portion 172. Then, a nozzle or the like for filling the resin from the opening 179 is inserted, and the heat conductive resin is filled in the concave portion and the small diameter portion 172 formed by the insulating portion 82 and the eyelet portion 83.
  • the heat pipe 20 is inserted into the case 170 from the opening 179 until the rear end 20b of the heat pipe 20 reaches the insulating portion 82, and the heat conductive resin is solidified in that state.
  • the support base part 21 and the heat conductive member 3160 are integrally formed from the same heat conductive resin material.
  • the heat conductive resin When filling the heat conductive resin, it is preferable to fill the heat conductive resin in an amount that does not reach the bottom surface 177 slightly. Then, when the heat pipe 20 is inserted, the heat conductive resin is pushed up, enters the large diameter portion 171 beyond the bottom surface 177, and can reach the rear side end portion 51 c of the circuit board 51.
  • the heat conductive resin may reach the front side further than the rear side end portion 51 c of the circuit board 51.
  • the volume of the heat conductive resin to be filled increases and the weight of the lamp increases, it is preferable to fill the heat conductive resin to such an extent that the lamp weight does not become too heavy.
  • the support base part 21 needs to be provided with electrical insulation, it is necessary to use a heat conductive resin provided with electrical insulation.
  • the following method can be employed. After the circuit unit 50 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 171 from the rear-side opening 175, the power receiving portion 80 on which the support pedestal portion 21 in which the concave portion into which the rear-side end portion 20b of the heat pipe 20 is inserted is formed is mounted in advance. Is fitted to the small diameter portion 172. Then, the heat pipe 20 is inserted into the case 170 from the opening 179, and the rear side end portion 20 b is inserted into the concave portion of the support base portion 21.
  • a nozzle or the like for filling the heat conductive resin is inserted from the wiring hole 114 and filled with the heat conductive resin until reaching the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51.
  • a part of the periphery of the opening 179 may be cut out to form a gap with the heat pipe 20, and a nozzle may be inserted through the gap to fill the thermally conductive resin.
  • a through hole for inserting a nozzle or the like for filling a heat conductive resin may be formed separately. In these cases, after filling the heat conductive resin, the gaps and through holes may be closed with a resin or the like.
  • FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 3200 according to Modification 36.
  • the lamp 3200 has a heat conductive member 3160. Similar to the lamp 3100 according to the modified example 35, the heat conductive member 3160 reaches the rear side end portion 51c of the circuit board 51, and the bottom portion 20a of the heat pipe 20 is buried in the heat conductive member 3160. is doing.
  • the rear end 51 c of the circuit board 51 and the bottom 20 a of the heat pipe 20, and the rear end 51 c and the small diameter portion 72 are thermally connected by a heat conductive member 3160.
  • the heat dissipation of the circuit unit 50 can be improved as in the lamp 3100 according to the modification 35.
  • FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 3300 according to Modification 37.
  • FIG. FIG. 43 is a plan view of a circuit unit 3350 according to this modification, and is a plan view seen from the inner peripheral surface side of the circuit board 3351 in a state where the circuit board 3351 is spread on a plane.
  • the circuit board 3351 is a flexible board made of an insulating material such as polyimide.
  • the circuit board 3351 includes a front circuit board part 3351A and a rear circuit board part 3351B connected to the rear side of the front circuit board part 3351A.
  • the front circuit board portion 3351A has a shape in which a fan-shaped central portion is cut out by a smaller fan having the same central angle.
  • the rear circuit board part 3351B is connected to the rear side from the center part of the rear arc part 3351Ac corresponding to the arc of the fan-cut part of the front circuit board part 3351A.
  • the rear circuit board portion 3351B is connected to the rear side from the central portion of the rear arc portion 3351Ac, but is not limited thereto. It is not limited to the central part as long as it is connected to the rear side from a part of the rear arc part 3351Ac. For example, it may be connected from a position close to the side, or a part corresponding to a fan-shaped side. You may continue from the side edge part containing a certain side edge.
  • the front circuit board portion 3351A and the electronic component 52 mounted on the front circuit board portion 3351A are accommodated in a large diameter portion 3371 of the case 3370.
  • the electronic component 52 mounted on the rear circuit board portion 3351B and the rear circuit board portion 3351B is accommodated in the small diameter portion 3372 of the case 3370. Accordingly, a part of the electronic component 52 can be arranged in the small diameter portion 3372, and the number of the electronic components 52 arranged in the large diameter portion 3371 can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.
  • the electronic component 52 having a short height and the surface mounting type may be mounted on the outer peripheral surface 3351Aa of the front circuit board portion 3351A and the outer peripheral surface 3351Ba of the rear circuit board portion 3351B.
  • the cross section of the circuit board 3351 passing through the portion where the front circuit board part 3351A and the rear circuit board part 3351B are connected to each other is rearward from the front side edge of the circuit board 3351. It is linear up to the side edge.
  • the continuous portion is in contact with the inner peripheral edge of the bottom surface 3377, and on the front side of the contacting portion, the outer peripheral surface 3351Aa of the front circuit board portion 3351A and the inner peripheral surface 3371a of the large diameter portion 3371.
  • the portion of the inner peripheral surface on the front side of the small diameter portion 3372 that is in contact with the outer peripheral surface 3351Ba of the rear circuit board portion 3351B is cut obliquely. Accordingly, the gap between the outer peripheral surface 3351Aa of the front circuit board portion 3351A and the inner peripheral surface 3371a of the large diameter portion 3371 can be reduced, and the front circuit board portion 3351A is larger in the large diameter portion 3371. Can spread. Thereby, compared with the case where the inner peripheral surface of the front side of the small diameter portion 3372 is not cut obliquely, the area of the front circuit board portion 3351A can be increased.
  • the circuit unit 3350 is inserted into the case 3370 from the rear side opening 3375 of the case 3370, but is not limited thereto.
  • the circuit unit 3350 according to this modification is applied to the lamp 700 according to the modification 4 shown in FIG. 12, the circuit unit 3350 is opened to the front side before the mounting substrate 711 is attached to the case 770. 776 may be inserted into case 770.
  • FIGS. 44A and 44B are views schematically showing a schematic configuration of a circuit board 3450 according to the modified example 38.
  • FIG. FIG. 44A is a plan view of the circuit unit 3450 when the circuit board 3451 is developed on a plane, as viewed from the inner peripheral surface 3451Ab and the inner peripheral surface 3451Bb side.
  • FIG. 44B is a partially cutaway perspective view schematically showing an aspect of the circuit unit 3450 in a state of being accommodated in the case.
  • FIG. 44A is a plan view of the circuit unit 3450 when the circuit board 3451 is developed on a plane, as viewed from the inner peripheral surface 3451Ab and the inner peripheral surface 3451Bb side.
  • FIG. 44B is a partially cutaway perspective view schematically showing an aspect of the circuit unit 3450 in a state of being accommodated in the case.
  • the case is not shown for the sake of clarity, but here, the circuit unit 3450 is accommodated in the case 770 according to the fourth modification, for example.
  • the circuit board 3351 is a flexible board made of a material having insulating properties and flexibility such as polyimide.
  • the circuit board 3451 has a configuration in which a front circuit board part 3451A and a rear circuit board part 3451B are connected via a bridge part 3451C.
  • the front circuit board portion 3451A has a shape in which a fan-shaped center portion is cut out by a smaller fan shape having the same central angle.
  • the rear circuit board portion 3451B has a shape in which the central portion on the front side is excluded from the shape in which the central portion of the sector is cut out with a smaller sector having the same central angle.
  • the excluded portion is a bridge portion 3451C.
  • the front circuit board part 3451A and the rear circuit board part 3451B are both accommodated in the large-diameter part and the small-diameter part in a state of being bent into a cylindrical shape.
  • the bridge portion 3451C is a portion placed on the bottom surface of the case, and the length of the bridge portion 3451C corresponds to the width of the bottom surface of the case.
  • the length of the front arc portion 3451Bc of the rear circuit board portion 3451B is set shorter than the length of the rear arc portion 3451Ac of the front circuit board portion 3451A.
  • the outer diameter of the cylinder at the front end of the rear circuit board 3451B is smaller than the inner diameter of the cylinder at the rear end of the front circuit board 3451A.
  • the portion of the rear circuit board portion 3451B that is located in front of the bridge portion 3451C is disposed in the cylinder of the front circuit board portion 3451A without interfering with the front circuit board portion 3451A.
  • the bridge portion 3451C is provided, the size of the gap between the front circuit board portion 3451A and the inner peripheral surface of the large-diameter portion can be reduced in the case of the circuit unit 3350 according to the modified example 43. It can be made smaller than Thereby, compared with the circuit unit 3350, the area of the front circuit board part 3451A can be made larger.
  • the size of the gap between the rear circuit board part 3451B and the inner peripheral surface of the small diameter part can be reduced as compared with the case of the circuit board 3351 according to the modified example 43, and the rear part of the small diameter part can be rearward.
  • the side circuit board portion 3451B can be arranged in a cylindrical shape. Thereby, compared with the circuit unit 3350, the area of the back side circuit board part 3451B can be enlarged more. Therefore, since more electronic components 52 can be mounted on the rear circuit board portion 3451B, the number of electronic components mounted on the front circuit board portion 3451A can be reduced, and the case can be reduced in size.
  • the areas of the front circuit board portion 3451A and the rear circuit board portion 3451B can be further increased. As a result, even when the case is downsized, the area of the circuit board necessary for mounting the electronic component can be ensured to contribute to downsizing of the lamp.
  • FIG. 45 (a) and 45 (b) are perspective views showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 3500 according to Modification 39.
  • FIG. 45A is a perspective view of the lamp 3500 viewed from the rear side
  • FIG. 45B is a perspective view of the lamp 3500 viewed from the front side.
  • FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the lamp 3500. In FIG. 46, the lower side of the drawing is the front and the upper side of the drawing is the rear.
  • the lamp 3500 has a disk shape or a flat columnar shape as a whole, and is a so-called light engine type lamp.
  • the lamp 3500 has an outer diameter of 50 mm to 100 mm and a height of 30 mm to 50 mm.
  • the lamp 3500 includes a heat conductive sheet 3520, a support 3560, a filling member 3530, a light emitting unit 3510, a case 3570, a power receiving unit 3580, a circuit unit 3550, a reflecting mirror 3590, and a cover as main components. Part 3540 and the like.
  • FIG. 47 (a) is a perspective view of the case 3570 as viewed from the front side.
  • FIG. 47B is a perspective view schematically showing a state where the light emitting unit 3510 is attached to the case 3570.
  • FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of the lamp 3500. In FIG. 48, the lower side of the drawing is the front and the upper side of the drawing is the rear.
  • the light emitting unit 3510 includes a mounting substrate 3511, a plurality of LEDs 12 mounted on the mounting substrate 3511, and a sealing body 13 that covers the plurality of LEDs 12.
  • the mounting substrate 3511 is preferably formed using a material having electrical insulation and good thermal conductivity. Examples of the material having electrical insulation and good thermal conductivity include ceramics such as alumina and aluminum nitride. Alternatively, a metal core substrate having a laminated structure of a metal substrate such as aluminum or copper and a resin substrate may be used.
  • FIGS. 45 (b), 46 and 47 (b) only the sealing body 13 is shown because the LED 12 is covered with the sealing body 13 and cannot be seen.
  • the support 3560 is a member that serves as a base on which the light emitting unit 3510 is attached via the filling member 3530. Moreover, the support stand 3560 is a member connected to a lighting fixture. Specifically, a base structure of, for example, GH76p type is formed on the upper portion of the support base 3560, and is attached and fixed to the lighting fixture.
  • the support base 3560 also plays a role of transferring heat generated in the light emitting unit 3510 to the lighting fixture side, and thus is preferably formed from a material having good thermal conductivity. Examples of the material having good thermal conductivity include metal materials such as aluminum.
  • the heat conductive sheet 3520 is a heat conductive sheet for conducting heat transferred from the light emitting portion 3510 to the support base 3560 through the filling member 3530 to the lighting fixture side and radiating it.
  • the heat conductive sheet 3520 is a rubber or resin sheet, for example, a silicon sheet or an acrylic sheet. Moreover, you may use what mixed metal filler etc. in rubber
  • the case 3570 is a cylindrical member formed of a material such as an insulating resin, and includes a large diameter portion 3571 and a small diameter portion 3572.
  • a material such as an insulating resin
  • the insulating resin material for example, PBT (polybutylene terephthalate) or the like can be used.
  • the large-diameter portion 3571 and the small-diameter portion 3572 are, for example, substantially cylindrical shapes that are open on both sides, and are connected to each other in a manner in which the cylinder axes substantially coincide with each other, and are integrally formed.
  • the large diameter portion 3571 has openings at both ends, but the end on the rear side is not an opening as a whole, and is part of the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical member having an opening at the front end. Further, the shape is such that an opening is provided. That is, an opening 3577 a is formed in the central portion of the bottom 3577 of the large diameter portion 3571.
  • a fixing portion 3573 extending rearward is formed on a peripheral portion of the opening 3577a that is a portion that defines the opening 3577a of the bottom portion 3577.
  • a plurality of screw holes 3577 b are formed in the bottom portion 3577, and the case 3570 is fixed to the support base 3560 with fixing screws 3503.
  • the mounting substrate 3511 of the light emitting unit 3510 is sandwiched between the fixing unit 3573 and the support base 3560, whereby the light emitting unit 3510 is attached to the rear side of the case 3570.
  • the light emitting unit 3510 is attached to the case 3570 in a state where the LED 12 and the sealing body 13 are positioned in the opening 3577a. Further, the opening 3577a is closed by the mounting substrate 3511. In FIG. 47B, the LED 12 is covered with the sealing body 13 and cannot be seen.
  • a circuit unit 3550 and a reflecting mirror 3590 are accommodated in the large diameter portion 3571.
  • the cover part 3540 is attached to the front side edge part of the large diameter part 3571 in the state accommodated in the inside of the large diameter part 3571. That is, the front side opening 3571a is closed by the cover portion 3540.
  • a plurality of recesses 3571b1 are formed on the front side of the inner peripheral surface 3571b of the large-diameter portion 3571 of the case 3570 at intervals in the circumferential direction.
  • the filling member 3530 is disposed between the support base 3560 and the mounting substrate 3511.
  • the filling member 3530 serves as a buffer. It is a sheet-like member. Therefore, the filling member 3530 may be made of a material that has elasticity to some extent and can allow deformation to some extent.
  • the filling member 3530 is formed of a material having thermal conductivity in order to thermally connect the mounting substrate 3511 and the support base 3560 and smoothly conduct heat from the light emitting unit 3510 to the support base 3560. It is good to be done. Furthermore, the filling member 3530 is more preferably formed of a material having electrical insulation properties in order to ensure electrical insulation properties between the mounting substrate 3511 and the support base 3560.
  • rubber, resin, or the like can be used as a specific material for forming the filling member 3530.
  • silicone rubber or butyl rubber can be used as the rubber.
  • the resin for example, a silicone resin or an acrylic resin can be used.
  • the reflecting mirror 3590 is an optical member that is housed in the large-diameter portion 3571, reflects the light emitted from the light emitting portion 3510, and emits the light to the front side of the lamp 3500 via the cover portion 3540.
  • the reflecting mirror 3590 is a circular plate in a plan view that is connected to a cylindrical reflecting mirror main body 3591 that gradually increases in diameter from the rear side toward the front side, and a front end 3591a of the reflecting mirror main body 3591. It is comprised from the flange part 3592 which is a shape member.
  • the rear end 3591b of the reflector main body 3591 is inserted into the small diameter portion 3572 from the opening 3577a of the large diameter portion 3571.
  • the LED 12 sealed by the sealing body 13 of the light emitting unit 3510 is located in the rear side opening of the reflecting mirror main body 3591. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 12 is emitted to the in-cylinder space of the reflecting mirror main body 3591 through the rear opening of the reflecting mirror main body 3591.
  • the reflecting mirror 3590 is formed of an insulating resin material such as polycarbonate.
  • at least the reflecting mirror main body 3591 is formed of a white resin material. Accordingly, light emitted from the light emitting unit 3510 to the in-cylinder space of the reflecting mirror main body 3591 is reflected to the front side by the inner peripheral surface 3591c of the reflecting mirror main body 3591.
  • the rear side end of the reflector main body 3591 is in contact with the mounting board 3511 and plays a role of fixing the mounting board 3511 between the support base 3560 and the fixing part 3573.
  • the outer diameter of the flange portion 3592 is set to be approximately equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large diameter portion 3571. Further, the flange portion 3592 is in contact with the cover portion 3540. Thereby, the reflecting mirror 3590 is stably held and accommodated in the large diameter portion 3571 without rattling.
  • a reflective film made of a metal thin film or the like may be formed on the inner peripheral surface 3591c of the reflector main body 3591 by vapor deposition, coating, or the like to improve the reflectance.
  • the circuit unit 3550 is mainly for turning on the LED 12, and includes a circuit board 3551 and various electronic components 52 arranged on the circuit board 3551.
  • the circuit board 3551 is made of, for example, a resin such as polyimide having electrical insulation and flexibility. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 48, the circuit board 3551 has an inner peripheral surface 3551b which is a main surface on which the electronic component 52 is mounted on the inner side, and an inner peripheral surface 3571b of the large diameter portion 3571 of the case 3570. It is housed in a space between the reflecting mirror 3590 and the inner peripheral surface 3571b of the large-diameter portion 3571 in the large-diameter portion 3571 in a curved manner along the line.
  • the circuit board is formed as a flat plate member having an annular shape in plan view, and compared with the case where the circuit board is attached to the bottom 3577 of the large-diameter portion 3571 in a posture orthogonal to the cylindrical axis of the case, the area of the circuit board is reduced. Can be increased. Therefore, even when the case 3570 is miniaturized as the lamp 3500 is miniaturized, a circuit board mounting area sufficient to mount necessary electronic components can be secured. Thereby, it can contribute to size reduction of a lamp.
  • the reflecting mirror main body 3591 has a shape that increases in diameter from the rear side toward the front side, and therefore, the reflecting mirror main body portion 3591 and the inner peripheral surface 3571b of the large diameter portion 3571 The space between is larger on the rear side. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the tall electronic component 52 a among the electronic components 52 on the rear side of the circuit board 3551.
  • not all electronic components 52 may be arranged on the inner peripheral surface 3551b of the circuit board 3551.
  • some of the electronic components 52 are outer peripheral surfaces 3551a of the circuit board 3551. It may be arranged above. In that case, the short electronic component 52 may be disposed on the outer peripheral surface 3551a.
  • the electronic component 52 to be mounted on the outer peripheral surface 3551a is more preferably a surface-mount type electronic component 52.
  • the power receiving unit 3580 includes a pair of electrical connection pins 3581. As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the electrical connection pin 3581 extends from a through hole 3577 c provided in a portion located outside the small diameter portion 3572 at the bottom 3577 of the large diameter portion 3571 toward the outside of the large diameter portion 3571. It protrudes. When the lamp 3500 is attached to the lighting fixture, the rear side end 3581a, which is the protruding portion of the electrical connection pin 3581, contacts an electrode provided in the socket of the lighting fixture, Receive power from outside.
  • One end of the wiring 53 is connected to the front end 3581b which is the end opposite to the rear end 3581a of the electrical connection pin 3581 and is the end accommodated in the large diameter portion 3571.
  • the other end of the wiring 53 is connected to an electrode (not shown) formed on the circuit board 3551. Thereby, the electrical connection pin 3581 and the circuit unit 3550 are electrically connected.
  • the cover portion 3540 is a flat bottomed cylindrical member attached to the front side of the case 3570 in order to protect the member disposed inside the case 3570.
  • the cover part 3540 includes a front cover 3541 corresponding to the bottom part of the cylinder, a side wall part 3542 corresponding to the side wall part of the cylinder, a claw-like part 3543 extending from the side wall part 3542 to the rear side, and the like.
  • the side wall portion 3542 is fitted into the large diameter portion 3571 from the front opening 3571a of the large diameter portion 3571, and the claw-shaped portion 3543 is engaged with the concave portion 3571b1 provided on the inner peripheral surface 3571b of the large diameter portion 3571.
  • the cover portion 3540 is attached to the case 3570.
  • the attachment of the cover portion 3540 to the case 3570 is not limited to the above engagement structure, and for example, an adhesive, a rivet, a screw, or the like may be used.
  • the cover portion 3540 is formed using a resin material having a high light transmittance such as polycarbonate. Accordingly, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 3510 and the light reflected by the inner peripheral surface 3591c of the reflector main body 3591 are transmitted through the cover 3540 and emitted to the front of the lamp 3500.
  • a paint containing silica or the like may be applied to the inner surface of the cover portion 3540 in order to improve light diffusibility. Further, the light diffusibility may be improved by forming a large number of minute recesses (dimples) on the inner surface of the cover portion 3540 or performing frost processing.
  • the cover portion 3540 may include a light wavelength conversion member such as a phosphor.
  • a light wavelength conversion member such as a phosphor.
  • the wavelength of the light emitted from the light emitting unit by the cover unit 3540 can be converted to convert the light color.
  • the circuit board 3551 is a flexible flexible board even in the configuration of this modification, and thus the circuit board 3551 is curved along the inner peripheral surface of the large-diameter portion 3571 of the case 3570.
  • the circuit unit 3550 is accommodated in the large diameter portion 3571.
  • the rigid flat circuit board is slightly inclined with respect to the cylindrical axis (or slightly inclined with respect to the cylindrical axis). The following effects can be obtained as compared with the case of being housed in the case in the posture).
  • the area of the circuit board 3551 can be made larger than the space inside the case 3570 (here, the space inside the large diameter portion 3571).
  • the area of the circuit board 3551 necessary for mounting the plurality of electronic components 52 can be secured, and the lamp 3500 can be downsized.
  • ⁇ Modification 40> In the modified example 11 and the modified example 21, the case where the circuit board is curved and the two opposing sides are bonded with an adhesive or the like to make the circuit board cylindrical has been described.
  • the method of making the circuit board cylindrical is not limited to this.
  • a connecting member such as a connector may be used.
  • FIG. 49 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a circuit unit 3650 according to Modification 40.
  • the circuit unit 3650 includes a flexible insulating circuit board 3651 and various electronic components 52 mounted on the inner peripheral surface 3651b of the circuit board 3651.
  • a connecting member 3658 is provided on the outer peripheral surface 3651a of the circuit board 3651.
  • the connecting member 3658 includes a connector 3658a and a socket 3658b to which the connector 3658a is connected.
  • the connector 3658a is connected to the base 3658a1 attached on the outer peripheral surface 3651a at the side end portion corresponding to the fan-shaped side of the circuit board 3651, so as to protrude from the base 3658a1 to the outside of the circuit board 3651.
  • the base 3658a1 and the claw-like portion 3658a2 are integrally formed.
  • a pair of connectors 3658 a are provided on the outer peripheral surface 3651 a at one side end of the circuit board 3651.
  • a pair of sockets 3658b are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors 3658a on the outer peripheral surface 3651a at the other side end of the circuit board 3651.
  • Both the connector 3658a and the socket 3658b are formed of resin or the like.
  • the claw-like portion 3658a2 of the connector 3658a is inserted into the insertion hole 3658b1 of the socket 3658b in a state where the circuit board 3651 is curved with the inner peripheral surface 3651b facing inward. Then, the claw head portion 3658a2a of the claw-like portion 3658a2 fits into the engagement hole 3658b2 of the socket 3658b and engages with each other. As a result, both end portions of the circuit board 3651 are coupled to hold the circuit board 3651 in a cylindrical shape.
  • connection member for making a circuit board into a cylindrical shape the following modifications can also be implemented.
  • FIG. 50A is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a circuit unit 3750 according to the modified example 41.
  • FIG. 50 (a) the circuit board 3751 of the circuit unit 3750 is connected by a connecting member 3758 with a gap between both end portions, and is held in a cylindrical shape.
  • the connecting member 3758 is formed by attaching connector heads 3758b to both ends of a long string-like member 3758a.
  • FIG. 50B is an enlarged perspective view of a main part showing a mode in which the connector head 3758b is connected to the circuit board 3751.
  • the connector head 3758b includes a rectangular parallelepiped head base 3758b1 and a claw-shaped portion 3758b2 connected to the head base 3758b1.
  • a total of four through-holes 3751e are formed at both end portions of the circuit board 3751, one pair each.
  • FIG. 50 (b) shows only one of the four through holes 3751e.
  • the claw-like portion 3758 b 2 is inserted into the through hole 3751 e and the both engage with each other, whereby the connector head 3758 b is attached to the circuit board 3751.
  • FIG. 50A the shape of the circuit board 3751 is held in a cylindrical shape.
  • the mating partner of the connector head 3758b is a through-hole provided in the circuit board 3751. Therefore, another member such as a socket of the connecting member 3658 according to the modified example 40 is used. It does not have to be. Thereby, it can contribute to resource saving and cost control.
  • a gap is opened between both end portions of the circuit board 3751.
  • FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 3800 according to the modified example 42.
  • the case 3870 of the lamp 3800 has a plurality of fixing protrusions 3877 b protruding forward from the bottom surface 3877 of the large diameter portion 3871.
  • the fixing projection 3877b is a rod-like projection, and the tip has a claw shape.
  • the distance between the fixing protrusion 3877 b and the inner peripheral surface 3871 a of the large diameter portion 3871 is substantially the same as the thickness of the circuit board 51.
  • the fixing protrusions 3877b are arranged in an annular shape with a space therebetween in the circumferential direction when viewed in plan.
  • the circuit unit 50 Prior to the mounting substrate 711 being fixed to the protrusion 3878, the circuit unit 50 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 3871 from the front opening 3876. Then, the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51 is inserted between the fixing projection 3877b and the inner peripheral surface 3871a of the large diameter part 3871, and the circuit board 51 is fixed in the large diameter part 3871.
  • the fixing protrusion 3877b since the fixing protrusion 3877b has a claw-like tip, it is caught by the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51, and the circuit board 51 is difficult to come off.
  • the electronic component 52 is not disposed in a portion of the inner peripheral surface 51b of the circuit board 51 that is in contact with the claw of the fixing projection 3877b. Further, it is preferable that no wiring pattern is formed in the portion.
  • the fixing protrusion 3877b is not limited to the form having a claw-like tip, and may be a columnar protrusion.
  • the plurality of fixing protrusions 3877b are arranged in a ring shape with a space in the circumferential direction in a plan view, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • it may be a continuous annular protrusion in plan view.
  • the annular projecting portion may not be continuous, but a part thereof may be lost and a gap may be opened.
  • the lamp may be a combination of the partial configuration of the lamp according to each of the above embodiments and the configuration according to each of the above modifications as appropriate.
  • the materials, numerical values, and the like described in the description of each of the above embodiments and modifications are merely preferable examples, and are not limited thereto.
  • each drawing is a schematic diagram, and the dimensions and ratios of the members are given as examples, and do not necessarily match the actual dimensions and ratios of the lamps.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Non-Portable Lighting Devices Or Systems Thereof (AREA)
  • Led Device Packages (AREA)
  • Arrangement Of Elements, Cooling, Sealing, Or The Like Of Lighting Devices (AREA)
  • Fastening Of Light Sources Or Lamp Holders (AREA)

Abstract

This lamp is provided with: a light-emitting unit that results from a plurality of semiconductor light-emitting elements being disposed on a mounting substrate; an electricity reception unit that receives electrical power from the outside; a circuit unit having a plurality of electronic components and a circuit board to which same are mounted; and a cylindrical or bowl-shaped case that houses the circuit unit. The circuit unit is housed in the case in a manner such that the circuit board is along the inner peripheral surface of the case.

Description

ランプlamp
 本発明は、半導体発光素子を利用したランプに関し、特に、ケースの小型化に関する。 The present invention relates to a lamp using a semiconductor light emitting element, and more particularly to miniaturization of a case.
 近年、白熱電球の代替品として、LED(Light Emitting Diode)などの半導体発光素子を利用した電球形のランプが普及しつつある。 In recent years, light bulb shaped lamps using semiconductor light emitting elements such as LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) are becoming popular as an alternative to incandescent light bulbs.
 このようなランプは、一般的に、一の実装基板に多数のLEDを実装し、当該実装基板の裏側、外部から電力を受電する受電部としての口金との間に存するケース(特許文献1では「外郭部材2」)内部の空間内にLEDを点灯するための回路ユニットが収納され、LEDから発せられる光を、透光カバー部材としてのグローブを介して外部に出射する構成を有している。 Such a lamp is generally a case in which a large number of LEDs are mounted on one mounting board and between the back side of the mounting board and a base as a power receiving unit that receives power from the outside (in Patent Document 1). "Outer member 2") A circuit unit for lighting the LED is housed in the internal space, and the light emitted from the LED is emitted to the outside through a globe as a translucent cover member. .
 そして、LEDで発生した熱を口金へと伝導し、当該ケースに熱が蓄積しないように、ケースが良熱伝導材料である金属で形成されたものが広く使用されている。電子部品を有する回路ユニットは、金属製のケースとの間の電気的絶縁を確保するために、樹脂等から成る絶縁性の回路ホルダ(特許文献1では「絶縁部材26」)に収容したうえで、ケース内に収納されている。(特許文献1、非特許文献1(第12頁)参照)。 In order to conduct heat generated in the LED to the base and not accumulate in the case, a case in which the case is formed of a metal that is a good heat conductive material is widely used. A circuit unit having an electronic component is accommodated in an insulating circuit holder made of resin or the like (“insulating member 26” in Patent Document 1) in order to ensure electrical insulation with a metal case. It is stored in the case. (See Patent Document 1, Non-Patent Document 1 (page 12)).
 また、LEDを利用したランプは、電球型に限られず、蛍光灯のような直管形のLEDランプも近年普及しつつある。 In addition, lamps using LEDs are not limited to light bulbs, and straight tube LED lamps such as fluorescent lamps are also becoming popular in recent years.
特開2006-313717号公報JP 2006-313717 A
 ところで、従来、半導体発光素子を用いたランプには、そのケース内部に回路ユニットが収納されているためケース部分が大きくならざるを得ず、白熱電球とはその形状や大きさが異なることから、白熱電球を利用してきた従来の照明器具への装着適合率が100%ではない。 By the way, conventionally, in a lamp using a semiconductor light emitting element, the circuit unit is housed inside the case, so the case part has to be large, and since the shape and size of the incandescent light bulb are different, The fitting compatibility rate with conventional lighting fixtures that have used incandescent bulbs is not 100%.
 そのため、ケース部分のサイズを小さくして従来の白熱電球により近い形状を有する半導体発光素子を用いたランプの開発に対する要請が高まっている。 Therefore, there is an increasing demand for the development of a lamp using a semiconductor light emitting element having a shape closer to that of a conventional incandescent bulb by reducing the size of the case portion.
 また、直管形ランプにおいては、発光部を覆う透光性のバルブの両端にケースが取着されているが、ケース部分は非発光部分であるため、ケースのサイズが大きいと非発光部分が大きくなり見た目の印象が悪いという問題がある。 In a straight tube lamp, a case is attached to both ends of a light-transmitting bulb that covers the light-emitting part. However, since the case part is a non-light-emitting part, if the case size is large, the non-light-emitting part is There is a problem that the impression that it grows is bad.
 ここで、ケース内部には通常、回路ユニットが収容されている。回路ユニットは、回路基板上に各種電主部品が搭載されて構成されている。そのため、ケース部分のサイズが小さくなれば、回路ユニットも小型化する必要がある。そのためには、回路基板を小型化して各種電子部品を回路基板上に高密度で搭載する方法が考えられる。 Here, a circuit unit is usually housed inside the case. The circuit unit is configured by mounting various electric main components on a circuit board. Therefore, if the size of the case portion is reduced, the circuit unit needs to be reduced in size. For that purpose, a method of miniaturizing the circuit board and mounting various electronic components on the circuit board at high density is conceivable.
 しかし、回路基板上には各種電子部品を搭載するスペースの他に、配線パターンを形成するスペースも必要であり、回路基板の小型化には限界がある。 However, in addition to a space for mounting various electronic components on the circuit board, a space for forming a wiring pattern is also required, and there is a limit to downsizing the circuit board.
 本発明は上記の問題点に鑑みてなされたもので、ケースが小型化されたランプを提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a lamp having a miniaturized case.
 本発明に係るランプは、複数の半導体発光素子が実装基板上に配置されて成る発光部と、外部から電力を受電する受電部と、複数の電子部品 およびそれらが実装された回路基板を有する回路ユニットと、前記回路ユニットを収容する筒状または椀状のケースと、を備えるランプであって、前記回路ユニットは、前記回路基板が前記ケースの内周面に沿った態様で、当該ケース内に収容されていることを特徴とする。 A lamp according to the present invention is a circuit having a light emitting unit in which a plurality of semiconductor light emitting elements are arranged on a mounting substrate, a power receiving unit that receives power from the outside, a plurality of electronic components, and a circuit board on which they are mounted. A lamp having a unit and a cylindrical or bowl-shaped case that accommodates the circuit unit, wherein the circuit unit is disposed in the case with the circuit board being along the inner peripheral surface of the case. It is housed.
 本発明に係るランプは、回路基板がケースの内周面に沿った態様でケース内に収容されているため、ケース内部の空間に対して回路基板の面積をできるだけ大きくすることができる。これにより、ケースを小型化した場合においても、複数の電子部品を実装するのに必要な回路基板の面積を確保することができる。 In the lamp according to the present invention, since the circuit board is accommodated in the case along the inner peripheral surface of the case, the area of the circuit board can be made as large as possible with respect to the space inside the case. Thus, even when the case is downsized, the area of the circuit board necessary for mounting a plurality of electronic components can be ensured.
実施形態1に係るランプの概略構成を示す一部切欠き外観斜視図である。1 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施形態1に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 図2におけるA-A’矢視断面図であって、回路ユニットがケース内に収容された状態を示す断面図である。FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ in FIG. 2, showing a state where the circuit unit is housed in a case. 実施形態1に係る回路ユニットを平面に展開した場合の概略構成を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows schematic structure at the time of expand | deploying the circuit unit which concerns on Embodiment 1 on the plane. 実施形態2に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Embodiment 2. FIG. 実施形態3に係るランプの概略構成を示す一部断面図である。6 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Embodiment 3. FIG. 実施形態4に係るランプの概略構成を示す図であって、(a)は側面図であり、(b)は断面図である。It is a figure which shows schematic structure of the lamp | ramp which concerns on Embodiment 4, Comprising: (a) is a side view, (b) is sectional drawing. 実施形態4に係るランプの回路ユニットおよび発光部の概略構成を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows schematic structure of the circuit unit of the lamp | ramp which concerns on Embodiment 4, and a light emission part. 変形例1に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to a first modification. 変形例2に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 2. 変形例3に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 3. FIG. 変形例4に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to modification example 4; 変形例5に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 5. FIG. 変形例7に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 7. FIG. 変形例8に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 8. FIG. 変形例9に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 9. FIG. 変形例11に係るランプの概略構成を示す図であって、(a)は側面図であり、(b)は断面図である。It is a figure which shows schematic structure of the lamp | ramp which concerns on the modification 11, Comprising: (a) is a side view, (b) is sectional drawing. 変形例12に係るランプの概略構成を示す側面図である。It is a side view which shows schematic structure of the lamp | ramp which concerns on the modification 12. 変形例13に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。14 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 13. FIG. 変形例14に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows schematic structure of the lamp | ramp which concerns on the modification 14. 変形例15に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 15. FIG. 変形例16に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。18 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 16. FIG. 変形例17に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 17; 変形例18に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 18. FIG. 変形例20に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 20. FIG. 変形例21に係るランプの回路ユニットがケース内に収容された状態を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the state in which the circuit unit of the lamp | ramp which concerns on the modification 21 was accommodated in the case. 変形例22に係るランプの回路ユニットがケース内に収容された状態を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the state in which the circuit unit of the lamp | ramp which concerns on the modification 22 was accommodated in the case. 変形例23に係るランプの回路ユニットがケース内に収容された状態を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the state in which the circuit unit of the lamp | ramp which concerns on the modification 23 was accommodated in the case. 変形例24に係るランプの概略構成を示す一部切欠き外観斜視図である。FIG. 28 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 24. 変形例24に係るランプの概略構成を示す一部断面図である。FIG. 22 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 24. 変形例25に係るランプの概略構成を示す一部切欠き外観斜視図である。FIG. 26 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 25. 変形例25に係るランプの概略構成を示す一部断面図である。FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 25. 変形例26に係るランプの概略構成を示す一部断面図である。27 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 26. FIG. 変形例27に係るランプの概略構成を示す一部断面図である。42 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 27. FIG. 変形例28に係るランプの概略構成を示す一部切欠き外観斜視図である。FIG. 38 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 28. 変形例28に係るランプの概略構成を示す一部断面図である。29 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification Example 28. FIG. 変形例28に係るランプのグローブを除去した状態を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the state which removed the glove | globe of the lamp | ramp which concerns on the modification 28. 変形例33に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 33. 変形例34に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 34. 変形例35に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。42 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 35. FIG. 変形例36に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。42 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 36. FIG. 変形例37に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。42 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 37. FIG. 変形例37に係る回路ユニットを平面に展開した場合の概略構成を示す平面図である。FIG. 38 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration when a circuit unit according to Modification 37 is developed on a plane. (a)は、変形例38に係る回路ユニットを平面に展開した場合の概略構成を示す平面図である。(b)は、ケース内に収容されている場合における湾曲された状態の変形例38に係る回路ユニットを模式的に示す一部切欠き斜視図である。(A) is a top view which shows schematic structure at the time of developing the circuit unit which concerns on the modification 38 on a plane. (B) is a partially cutaway perspective view schematically showing a circuit unit according to a modified example 38 in a curved state when accommodated in a case. (a)は、後方側から見た変形例39に係るランプの斜視図である。(b)は、前方側から見た変形例39に係るランプの斜視図である。(A) is a perspective view of the lamp | ramp which concerns on the modification 39 seen from the back side. (B) is the perspective view of the lamp | ramp which concerns on the modification 39 seen from the front side. 変形例39に係るランプの概略構成を示す分解斜視図である。42 is an exploded perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 39. FIG. (a)は、変形例39に係るケースの概略構成を示す斜視図である。(b)は、(a)に示すケースに変形例39に係る発光部が取着された状態を模式的に示す斜視図である。(A) is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a case according to Modification 39. FIG. (B) is a perspective view which shows typically the state by which the light emission part which concerns on the modification 39 was attached to the case shown to (a). 変形例39に係るランプの概略構成示す断面図である。42 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 39. FIG. 変形例40に係る回路ユニットの概略構成を示す斜視図である。14 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a circuit unit according to Modification 40. FIG. (a)は、変形例41に係る回路ユニットの概略構成を示す斜視図である。(b)は、変形例41に係る回路ユニットのコネクタと回路基板との接続の態様を模式的に示す一部切り欠き斜視図である。(A) is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a circuit unit according to Modification 41. FIG. (B) is a partially cutaway perspective view schematically showing a connection mode between a connector and a circuit board of a circuit unit according to Modification 41. FIG. 変形例42に係るランプの概略構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp according to Modification 42.
 以下、本発明の実施形態に係るランプについて、図面を参照しながら説明する。 Hereinafter, a lamp according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
 なお、図面は模式図であり、各図面における部材の縮尺は必ずしも実際のものと同じであるとは限らない。また、本願において、数値範囲を示す際に用いる符号「~」は、その両端の数値を含む。また、本実施形態で記載している、材料、数値等は好ましいものを例示しているだけであり、それに限定されることはない。また、本発明の技術的思想の範囲を逸脱しない範囲で、適宜変更は可能である。また、他の実施形態との構成の一部同士の組み合わせは、矛盾が生じない範囲で可能である。 Note that the drawings are schematic diagrams, and the scale of the members in each drawing is not necessarily the same as the actual one. In the present application, the symbol “˜” used to indicate a numerical range includes numerical values at both ends. In addition, the materials, numerical values, and the like described in this embodiment are merely preferable examples, and are not limited thereto. In addition, changes can be made as appropriate without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. Further, some combinations of configurations with other embodiments are possible within a range where no contradiction occurs.
 <実施形態1>
 [概略構成]
 図1は、実施形態1に係るランプ1の概略構成を示す一部切欠き外観斜視図である。図2は、ランプ1の概略構成を示す断面図である。図3は、図2におけるA-A’矢視断面図である。
<Embodiment 1>
[Schematic configuration]
FIG. 1 is a partially cutaway external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of the lamp 1. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ in FIG.
 ランプ1は、その主な構成として、発光部10、ケース70、受電部80、グローブ40、回路ユニット50等を備える。図2において、紙面上下方向に沿って描かれた一点鎖線はランプ1のランプ軸J1を示しており、紙面上方がランプ1の前方であって、紙面下方がランプ1の後方である。 The lamp 1 includes a light emitting unit 10, a case 70, a power receiving unit 80, a globe 40, a circuit unit 50, and the like as main components. In FIG. 2, the alternate long and short dash line drawn along the vertical direction of the paper indicates the lamp axis J <b> 1 of the lamp 1, and the upper side of the paper is the front of the lamp 1 and the lower side of the paper is the rear of the lamp 1.
 [各部構成]
 <発光部>
 発光部10は、光源として用いられる半導体発光素子としてのLED12、LED12が実装された実装基板11、および、実装基板11上においてLED12を被覆する封止体13を備える。発光部10は、回路ユニット50を介して受電部80とは反対側に配されており、LED12から発せられる光の主出射方向(以下、単に「主出射方向」という。)はランプ1の前方(紙面上方)に向けて配置されている。
[Each component configuration]
<Light emitting part>
The light emitting unit 10 includes an LED 12 as a semiconductor light emitting element used as a light source, a mounting substrate 11 on which the LED 12 is mounted, and a sealing body 13 that covers the LED 12 on the mounting substrate 11. The light emitting unit 10 is disposed on the opposite side of the power receiving unit 80 via the circuit unit 50, and the main emission direction of light emitted from the LED 12 (hereinafter simply referred to as “main emission direction”) is in front of the lamp 1. It is arranged facing (upward on the page).
 封止体13は、主として透光性材料からなるが、LED12から発せられた光の波長を所定の波長へと変換する必要がある場合には、前記透光性材料に光の波長を変換する波長変換材料が混入される。透光性材料としては、例えばシリコーン樹脂を利用することができ、波長変換材料としては、例えば蛍光体粒子を利用することができる。本実施形態では、青色光を出射するLED12と、青色光を黄色光に波長変換する蛍光体粒子が混入された透光性材料で形成された封止体13とが採用されており、LED12から出射された青色光の一部が封止体13によって黄色光に波長変換され、未変換の青色光と変換後の黄色光との混色により生成される白色光が発光部10から出射される。 The sealing body 13 is mainly made of a translucent material, but when it is necessary to convert the wavelength of the light emitted from the LED 12 to a predetermined wavelength, the wavelength of the light is converted into the translucent material. Wavelength conversion material is mixed. As the translucent material, for example, a silicone resin can be used, and as the wavelength conversion material, for example, phosphor particles can be used. In this embodiment, LED12 which radiates | emits blue light, and the sealing body 13 formed with the translucent material mixed with the fluorescent substance particle | grains which wavelength-convert blue light into yellow light are employ | adopted. A part of the emitted blue light is wavelength-converted into yellow light by the sealing body 13, and white light generated by mixing the unconverted blue light and the converted yellow light is emitted from the light emitting unit 10.
 なお、発光部10は、例えば、紫外線発光のLED12と三原色(赤色、緑色、青色)に発光する各色蛍光体粒子とを組み合わせたものでも良い。さらに、波長変換材料として半導体、金属錯体、有機染料、顔料など、ある波長の光を吸収し、吸収した光とは異なる波長の光を発する物質を含んでいる材料を用いても良い。 The light emitting unit 10 may be, for example, a combination of an ultraviolet light emitting LED 12 and each color phosphor particle that emits light in three primary colors (red, green, and blue). Further, a material containing a substance that absorbs light of a certain wavelength and emits light of a wavelength different from the absorbed light, such as a semiconductor, a metal complex, an organic dye, or a pigment, may be used as the wavelength conversion material.
 <ケース>
 ケース70は、熱伝導性を有する材料からなる筒状の部材であり、大径部71と小径部72とから成る。本実施形態においては、ケース70は、熱伝導性の樹脂から形成されている。大径部71および小径部72は、例えば、両側が開口した略円筒形状であって、円筒の軸とランプ軸J1とが一致するように軸方向に互いに連接され、一体的に形成されている。前方側に位置する大径部71は、前方から後方へ向けて縮径した略円筒形状を有し、大径部71には回路ユニット50が収容されている。一方、後方側に位置する小径部72には受電部80が外嵌されており、これによってケース70の後方側開口75が塞がれている。ケース70の前方側(グローブ40側)の開口は実装基板11により塞がれており、ケース70と実装基板11とは、一体的に形成されている。このように、ケース70と実装基板11とが一体的に形成されていることにより、部品点数を減じて組み付けの際の工程数を減じることができ、生産性向上に利することができる。
<Case>
The case 70 is a cylindrical member made of a material having thermal conductivity, and includes a large diameter portion 71 and a small diameter portion 72. In the present embodiment, the case 70 is formed from a heat conductive resin. The large-diameter portion 71 and the small-diameter portion 72 have, for example, a substantially cylindrical shape that is open on both sides, and are integrally connected to each other in the axial direction so that the cylindrical shaft and the lamp shaft J1 coincide with each other. . The large-diameter portion 71 located on the front side has a substantially cylindrical shape with a diameter reduced from the front toward the rear, and the circuit unit 50 is accommodated in the large-diameter portion 71. On the other hand, a power receiving unit 80 is externally fitted to the small diameter portion 72 located on the rear side, and the rear side opening 75 of the case 70 is thereby blocked. The opening on the front side (the globe 40 side) of the case 70 is closed by the mounting substrate 11, and the case 70 and the mounting substrate 11 are integrally formed. As described above, since the case 70 and the mounting substrate 11 are integrally formed, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and the number of processes in assembling, which can improve productivity.
 ケース70が形成される熱伝導性を有する材料としては、例えば、熱伝導性樹脂を用いることができる。このようにすることで、回路ユニット50および発光部10から発生しケース70に伝搬した熱を効率良く受電部80側に伝搬放熱させることができる。 As a material having thermal conductivity for forming the case 70, for example, a thermal conductive resin can be used. By doing in this way, the heat generated from the circuit unit 50 and the light emitting unit 10 and propagated to the case 70 can be efficiently propagated and radiated to the power receiving unit 80 side.
 <受電部>
 受電部80は、ランプ1が照明器具に取り付けられ点灯された際に、照明器具のソケットから電力を受けるための部材であり、本実施形態においては、いわゆる口金である。受電部80の種類は、特に限定されるものではないが、本実施形態ではエジソンタイプであるE26口金が使用されている。受電部80は、略円筒形状であって外周面が雄ネジとなっているシェル部81と、シェル部81に絶縁部82を介して装着されたアイレット部83とを備える。
<Power receiving unit>
The power receiving unit 80 is a member for receiving electric power from the socket of the lighting fixture when the lamp 1 is attached to the lighting fixture and turned on, and is a so-called base in the present embodiment. The type of the power receiving unit 80 is not particularly limited, but an Edison type E26 base is used in the present embodiment. The power receiving unit 80 includes a shell part 81 having a substantially cylindrical shape and an outer peripheral surface being a male screw, and an eyelet part 83 attached to the shell part 81 via an insulating part 82.
 <グローブ>
 グローブ40は、発光部10を覆う部材であり、グローブ40の開口側端部41がケース70の前方側端部73に設けられた溝部74に圧入により嵌め込まれている。グローブ40の内面42には、発光部10から発せられた光を拡散させる拡散処理、例えば、シリカや白色顔料等による拡散処理が施されている。グローブ40の内面42に入射した光はグローブ40を透過しグローブ40の外部へと取り出される。
<Glove>
The globe 40 is a member that covers the light emitting unit 10, and the opening-side end 41 of the globe 40 is fitted into a groove 74 provided in the front-side end 73 of the case 70 by press-fitting. The inner surface 42 of the globe 40 is subjected to a diffusion process for diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting unit 10, for example, a diffusion process using silica, white pigment, or the like. The light that has entered the inner surface 42 of the globe 40 passes through the globe 40 and is extracted outside the globe 40.
 なお、溝部74内に接着剤等を塗布した後にグローブ40の開口側端部41を溝部74に嵌め込むことにより、グローブ40をケース70に固着させてもよい。 The globe 40 may be fixed to the case 70 by fitting the opening side end 41 of the globe 40 into the groove 74 after applying an adhesive or the like in the groove 74.
 また、本実施形態においては、グローブ40の形状は、A型の電球のバルブを模した形状であるが、これに限定されず、どのような形状であっても良い。 Further, in the present embodiment, the shape of the globe 40 is a shape imitating a bulb of an A-type bulb, but is not limited to this, and may be any shape.
 <回路ユニット>
 回路ユニット50は、主にLED12を点灯させるためのものであり、回路基板51と、当該回路基板51上に配された各種の電子部品52とを有している。電子部品52は、主に受電部80を介して外部から受電した電力を変換してLED12を発光させるためのものである。しかし、これに限られず、例えば、明るさや温度等を検知するためのセンサや、調光や点灯・消灯等に係る信号をリモコンから受信し処理するための部品が、電子部品52に含まれていてもよい。
<Circuit unit>
The circuit unit 50 is mainly for lighting the LED 12, and includes a circuit board 51 and various electronic components 52 arranged on the circuit board 51. The electronic component 52 is mainly for converting the power received from the outside via the power receiving unit 80 to cause the LED 12 to emit light. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electronic component 52 includes a sensor for detecting brightness, temperature, and the like, and a component for receiving and processing a signal related to dimming, turning on / off, etc. from the remote control. May be.
 なお、電子部品52のうち、背が高いものを電子部品52aとする。また、ここでいう電子部品52の「背」とは、電子部品52が配設されている位置における回路基板51の法線方向における電子部品が実装されている回路基板51の主面から電子部品52先端部までの距離を意味する。ただし、背が高い電子部品とそうでない電子部品とを特に区別する必要が無い場合には、単に電子部品52と称する。なお、図2ほか各図においては、必ずしも全ての図示されている電子部品に符号を付しているとは限らない。一部の電子部品52については符号を省略している場合もある。 In addition, the electronic component 52a is the tall one among the electronic components 52. Further, the “back” of the electronic component 52 here refers to the electronic component from the main surface of the circuit board 51 on which the electronic component in the normal direction of the circuit board 51 is mounted at the position where the electronic component 52 is disposed. 52 means the distance to the tip. However, when there is no particular need to distinguish between a tall electronic component and a non-tall electronic component, they are simply referred to as an electronic component 52. In addition, in FIG. 2 and other drawings, not all of the illustrated electronic components are necessarily denoted by reference numerals. Some electronic components 52 may be omitted from the reference numerals.
 回路ユニット50と受電部80とは、配線53によって電気的に接続されている。また、回路ユニット50と発光部10とは、実装基板11に設けられた貫通孔である配線用孔14を通って配された配線15によりコネクタ16を介して電気的に接続されている。 The circuit unit 50 and the power receiving unit 80 are electrically connected by a wiring 53. Further, the circuit unit 50 and the light emitting unit 10 are electrically connected via the connector 16 by the wiring 15 arranged through the wiring hole 14 which is a through hole provided in the mounting substrate 11.
 回路基板51は、例えば、フレキシブル基板等の可撓性を有する樹脂から成り、図3に示すように、外周面51aを外側にし、内周面51bを内側にして湾曲した状態でケース70の大径部71内に収容されている。回路ユニット50は、回路基板51が曲げられた状態で後方側開口75からケース70内部に挿入される。ケース70の内部に挿入された後、回路基板51は、自身の弾性力により大径部71内で広がろうとするが、大径部71の内周面71aに接触して広がりが止められる。そして、回路基板51と内周面71aとの間の摩擦力により、回路ユニット50が大径部71内部に保持される。 The circuit board 51 is made of, for example, a flexible resin such as a flexible board. As shown in FIG. 3, the circuit board 51 is curved with the outer peripheral surface 51a on the outer side and the inner peripheral surface 51b on the inner side. It is accommodated in the diameter portion 71. The circuit unit 50 is inserted into the case 70 from the rear opening 75 in a state where the circuit board 51 is bent. After being inserted into the case 70, the circuit board 51 tries to expand in the large diameter portion 71 due to its own elastic force, but contact with the inner peripheral surface 71 a of the large diameter portion 71 is stopped. And the circuit unit 50 is hold | maintained inside the large diameter part 71 by the frictional force between the circuit board 51 and the internal peripheral surface 71a.
 上記のような構成により、回路基板51を内周面71aに沿って配置することができるため、従来のように平板状の回路基板を用いる場合と比較して回路基板の面積を増大させることができる。これにより、ケース70を小型化した場合でも、回路基板51の面積を最大化させることができる。即ち、電子部品52の実装面積を最大化させることができる。 With the configuration as described above, the circuit board 51 can be arranged along the inner peripheral surface 71a, so that the area of the circuit board can be increased as compared with the case of using a flat circuit board as in the prior art. it can. Thereby, even when the case 70 is downsized, the area of the circuit board 51 can be maximized. That is, the mounting area of the electronic component 52 can be maximized.
 ここで、実施形態1に係るランプ1においては、全ての電子部品52は、回路基板51の内周面51b上に搭載されており、外周面51a側には搭載されていない。そのため、ケース70が金属等の導電性の材料から形成されている場合であっても、電子部品52がケース70の内周面71aに接触することがなく、ショート等の問題は発生しない。ただし、このような場合においても、電子部品52のリード線の一部が回路基板51の外周面51a側にまで突出する場合や外周面51a上に半田付け等の処理が施されている場合が考えられる。その場合には、回路基板51の外周面51a上に絶縁性の樹脂をコーティングして保護膜を形成したり、ケース70の内周面71a上に同様にして絶縁性の保護膜を形成したりしてもよい。 Here, in the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment, all the electronic components 52 are mounted on the inner peripheral surface 51b of the circuit board 51 and are not mounted on the outer peripheral surface 51a side. Therefore, even when the case 70 is formed of a conductive material such as metal, the electronic component 52 does not contact the inner peripheral surface 71a of the case 70, and a problem such as a short circuit does not occur. However, even in such a case, a part of the lead wire of the electronic component 52 may protrude to the outer peripheral surface 51a side of the circuit board 51 or a process such as soldering may be performed on the outer peripheral surface 51a. Conceivable. In that case, an insulating resin is coated on the outer peripheral surface 51 a of the circuit board 51 to form a protective film, or an insulating protective film is similarly formed on the inner peripheral surface 71 a of the case 70. May be.
 なお、大径部71の底面77上に粘着部材を配置して回路基板51の後方側端部51cを固定してもよい。また、後方側端部51cに接着剤等を塗布して底面77に接着させてもよい。これにより、回路ユニット50を大径部71内により安定的に保持することができる。 Note that an adhesive member may be disposed on the bottom surface 77 of the large-diameter portion 71 to fix the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51. Alternatively, an adhesive or the like may be applied to the rear side end portion 51 c and adhered to the bottom surface 77. Thereby, the circuit unit 50 can be stably held in the large-diameter portion 71.
 図4は、回路基板51を平面上に広げた状態の回路ユニット50を回路基板51の内周面51b側から見た平面図である。なお、図4においては、一部の電子部品にのみ符号を付している。図4に示すように、広げた状態において回路基板51は、扇形の中心部分を、同じ中心角を有するより小さな扇形で切り欠いたような形状をしている。言い換えれば、円環を、その中心を通る2本の直線により切り取ったような形状をしている。これにより、回路基板51が大径部71内に収容された状態において、前方側において大きく広がり後方側に向かうにつれて広がりが小さくなるため、大径部71の内周面71aの形状によりフィットした形状をとることができる。 FIG. 4 is a plan view of the circuit unit 50 in a state where the circuit board 51 is spread on the plane, as viewed from the inner peripheral surface 51b side of the circuit board 51. In FIG. 4, only some electronic components are denoted by reference numerals. As shown in FIG. 4, in the expanded state, the circuit board 51 has a shape in which a fan-shaped central portion is cut out by a smaller fan having the same central angle. In other words, the shape of the ring is cut out by two straight lines passing through the center. Thereby, in the state in which the circuit board 51 is accommodated in the large diameter portion 71, the shape expands on the front side and decreases as it goes to the rear side, so that the shape fits the shape of the inner peripheral surface 71 a of the large diameter portion 71. Can be taken.
 以上説明したように、実施形態1に係るランプ1においては、回路基板51はケース70の内周面71aに沿って湾曲した形状で配置されているため、ケース70の内部空間に収容可能な回路基板51の面積を増大させることができる。これにより、ケース70が小型化された場合においても、電子部品52を実装し配線パターンを形成するためのスペースを回路基板51上に確保することができる。即ち、ケース70を小型化することができる。 As described above, in the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment, since the circuit board 51 is arranged in a curved shape along the inner peripheral surface 71 a of the case 70, a circuit that can be accommodated in the internal space of the case 70. The area of the substrate 51 can be increased. Thereby, even when the case 70 is reduced in size, a space for mounting the electronic component 52 and forming a wiring pattern can be secured on the circuit board 51. That is, the case 70 can be reduced in size.
 また、ランプの高機能化等により回路ユニットが備える電子部品の数が増大した場合においても、回路基板を湾曲させて実装面積を増大させることにより、ケースサイズの増大を抑制することができる。 In addition, even when the number of electronic components included in the circuit unit is increased due to a higher function of the lamp or the like, an increase in the case size can be suppressed by increasing the mounting area by curving the circuit board.
 さらには、本実施形態に係るランプ1の場合、ケース70に絶縁性を有する樹脂を用いることにより、従来のように回路ホルダを設ける必要がないため、ケース70内部の空間をその分広く利用して回路基板51の面積増大効果をより大きくすることができる。 Furthermore, in the case of the lamp 1 according to the present embodiment, by using an insulating resin for the case 70, there is no need to provide a circuit holder as in the conventional case, so that the space inside the case 70 is used widely. Thus, the effect of increasing the area of the circuit board 51 can be further increased.
 なお、実施形態1においては、回路基板はフレキシブル基板等の可撓性を有する樹脂から成るとしたが、これに限られない。例えば、樹脂やセラミック等を用いて可撓性を有しない湾曲した形状に形成された回路基板を用いてもよい。 In the first embodiment, the circuit board is made of a flexible resin such as a flexible board, but is not limited thereto. For example, you may use the circuit board formed in the curved shape which does not have flexibility using resin, a ceramic, etc.
 <実施形態2>
 図5は、実施形態2に係るランプ100の概略構成を示す断面図である。なお、説明の重複を避けるため、実施形態1と同じ構成要素については、同符号を付して、その説明を省略する。
<Embodiment 2>
FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment. In addition, in order to avoid duplication of description, about the same component as Embodiment 1, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
 図5に示すように、実施形態2に係るランプ100は、主な構成として、グローブ40、回路ユニット50、受電部80、発光部110、およびケース170を備える。ランプ100においては、発光部110がケース170から離間して設けられている。 As shown in FIG. 5, the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment includes a globe 40, a circuit unit 50, a power receiving unit 80, a light emitting unit 110, and a case 170 as main components. In the lamp 100, the light emitting unit 110 is provided apart from the case 170.
 ケース170は、実施形態1におけるケース70と同様に樹脂等の熱伝導性を有する絶縁性の材料から成り、以下に挙げる点が異なっている以外は、基本的な構成はケース70と同様であり、大径部171および小径部172から成る。ケース170は、大径部171の前方側の開口を塞ぐ前面178にはLED12が実装されておらず、前面178の中央部には開口179が設けられており、開口179を円柱状のヒートパイプ20が貫通している。また、ヒートパイプ20の直径と開口179の直径とは略等しい大きさとなっており、ヒートパイプ20と開口179との間には略隙間がない状態である。これにより、ヒートパイプ20のぐらつきが抑えられている。 The case 170 is made of an insulating material having thermal conductivity such as a resin like the case 70 in the first embodiment, and the basic configuration is the same as the case 70 except for the points described below. The large-diameter portion 171 and the small-diameter portion 172. In the case 170, the LED 12 is not mounted on the front surface 178 that closes the opening on the front side of the large-diameter portion 171, and the opening 179 is provided in the center of the front surface 178. The opening 179 is formed into a cylindrical heat pipe. 20 penetrates. Further, the diameter of the heat pipe 20 and the diameter of the opening 179 are substantially equal to each other, and there is substantially no gap between the heat pipe 20 and the opening 179. Thereby, the wobble of the heat pipe 20 is suppressed.
 受電部80の絶縁部82およびアイレット部83により形作られる凹部内には樹脂等の絶縁性材料から成る支持台座部21が前記凹部に対して固定的に設けられ、当該支持台座部21上に柱状のヒートパイプ20がランプ軸J1と略平行な方向に伸びるように立設されている。ヒートパイプ20の支持台座部21に立設されている側とは反対側の端部は、ケース170の大径部171の前面178に設けられた開口を貫通してグローブ40内部に位置しており、当該端部には接着剤等により発光部110の実装基板111が固定されている。これにより、発光部110はヒートパイプ20により支持され、グローブ40内に空中配置されている。 A support pedestal portion 21 made of an insulating material such as a resin is fixedly provided in the recess formed by the insulating portion 82 and the eyelet portion 83 of the power receiving unit 80, and a columnar shape is formed on the support pedestal portion 21. The heat pipe 20 is erected so as to extend in a direction substantially parallel to the lamp axis J1. The end of the heat pipe 20 opposite to the side erected on the support pedestal 21 passes through an opening provided in the front surface 178 of the large-diameter portion 171 of the case 170 and is located inside the globe 40. The mounting substrate 111 of the light emitting unit 110 is fixed to the end by an adhesive or the like. Accordingly, the light emitting unit 110 is supported by the heat pipe 20 and is disposed in the globe 40 in the air.
 発光部110は、光源として用いられる半導体発光素子としてのLED12、LED12が実装された実装基板111、および、実装基板111上においてLED12を被覆する封止体13を備える。ケース170の前面178に設けられた配線用孔114を通って配されている配線15およびコネクタ16により、発光部110と回路ユニット50とは電気的に接続されている。 The light emitting unit 110 includes an LED 12 as a semiconductor light emitting element used as a light source, a mounting substrate 111 on which the LED 12 is mounted, and a sealing body 13 that covers the LED 12 on the mounting substrate 111. The light emitting unit 110 and the circuit unit 50 are electrically connected by the wiring 15 and the connector 16 arranged through the wiring hole 114 provided in the front surface 178 of the case 170.
 実装基板111には透明基板が用いられており、透明基板としては、例えば、サファイア基板、ガラス基板、セラミック基板、透光性を有する樹脂基板等が用いられる。LED12から発せられる光のうち、LED12の後方側に発せられる光の一部は当該実装基板111を透過して、発光部110の後方側に出射される。これによりランプ100の配光角を広くして、良好な配光特性を得ることができる。 A transparent substrate is used as the mounting substrate 111. As the transparent substrate, for example, a sapphire substrate, a glass substrate, a ceramic substrate, a light-transmitting resin substrate, or the like is used. A part of the light emitted from the LED 12 to the rear side of the LED 12 passes through the mounting substrate 111 and is emitted to the rear side of the light emitting unit 110. As a result, the light distribution angle of the lamp 100 can be widened to obtain good light distribution characteristics.
 ヒートパイプ20は、例えば金属材料からなり、金属材料としては、例えばAl、Ag、Au、Ni、Rh、Pd、またはそれらの内の2以上からなる合金、またはCuとAgの合金などが考えられる。このような金属材料は、熱伝導性が良好であるため、発光部110で発生した熱を受電部80へと効率良く伝導させて、受電部80から照明器具(不図示)側へと放熱させることができる。 The heat pipe 20 is made of, for example, a metal material. As the metal material, for example, Al, Ag, Au, Ni, Rh, Pd, or an alloy made of two or more of them, or an alloy of Cu and Ag can be considered. . Since such a metal material has good thermal conductivity, the heat generated in the light emitting unit 110 is efficiently conducted to the power receiving unit 80 and radiated from the power receiving unit 80 to the lighting fixture (not shown). be able to.
 実施形態2においては、ヒートパイプ20は、発光部110を受電部80およびケース170に対して支持する支持部材としての役割と、発光部110から熱を受電部80へと伝える熱伝導部材としての役割の両方を果たしている。 In the second embodiment, the heat pipe 20 serves as a support member that supports the light emitting unit 110 with respect to the power receiving unit 80 and the case 170, and serves as a heat conduction member that transfers heat from the light emitting unit 110 to the power receiving unit 80. Plays both roles.
 なお、電子部品52とヒートパイプ20とが接触することが考えられるが、電子部品52とヒートパイプ20との間の絶縁性を確保するために、ヒートパイプ20を絶縁性の樹脂薄膜等により被覆してもよい。 In addition, although it is possible that the electronic component 52 and the heat pipe 20 contact, in order to ensure the insulation between the electronic component 52 and the heat pipe 20, the heat pipe 20 is covered with an insulating resin thin film or the like. May be.
 以上説明したように、実施形態2に係るランプ100においても実施形態1に係るランプ1と同様に、回路基板51はケース170の内周面171aに沿って湾曲した形状で配置されているため、回路基板51の面積を増大させることができる。これにより、ケース170が小型化された場合においても、電子部品52を実装し配線パターンを形成するためのスペースを回路基板51上に確保することができる。即ち、ケース170を小型化することができる。 As described above, also in the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment, the circuit board 51 is arranged in a curved shape along the inner peripheral surface 171a of the case 170, similarly to the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment. The area of the circuit board 51 can be increased. Thereby, even when the case 170 is reduced in size, a space for mounting the electronic component 52 and forming a wiring pattern can be secured on the circuit board 51. That is, the case 170 can be reduced in size.
 加えて、実施形態2の構成においては、ヒートパイプ20により発光部110の熱を受電部80へと伝導させて放熱させることにより、発光部110の放熱性を向上させることができる。 In addition, in the configuration of the second embodiment, the heat radiation of the light emitting unit 110 can be improved by conducting the heat of the light emitting unit 110 to the power receiving unit 80 by the heat pipe 20 to dissipate the heat.
 さらには、発光部110がグローブ40内に空中配置され、実装基板111に透明基板が用いられることにより、LED12の後方側に発せられる光の一部を発光部110の後方側に出射させ、これによりランプ100の配光角を広くして、良好な配光特性を得ることができる。 Furthermore, since the light emitting unit 110 is disposed in the air in the globe 40 and a transparent substrate is used for the mounting substrate 111, a part of the light emitted to the rear side of the LED 12 is emitted to the rear side of the light emitting unit 110. Thus, the light distribution angle of the lamp 100 can be widened to obtain good light distribution characteristics.
 <実施形態3>
 上記実施形態1および実施形態2においては、本発明の一態様である構成を電球型のランプに適用した場合を例に説明した。
<Embodiment 3>
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the case where the structure which is one embodiment of the present invention is applied to a light bulb type lamp has been described as an example.
 実施形態3においては、本発明の一態様である構成をハロゲンランプ形のランプに適用した場合を例に説明する。なお、説明の重複を避けるため、実施形態1および実施形態2と同じ構成要素については、同符号を付して、その説明を省略する。 In Embodiment 3, an example in which the structure which is one embodiment of the present invention is applied to a halogen lamp type lamp will be described. In addition, in order to avoid duplication of description, about the same component as Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
 図6は、実施形態3に係るランプ200の概略構成を示す一部切欠き図である。ランプ200は、主な構成として、ケース270、発光部210、回路ユニット250、およびカバー部240を備える。 FIG. 6 is a partially cutaway view showing a schematic configuration of the lamp 200 according to the third embodiment. The lamp 200 includes a case 270, a light emitting unit 210, a circuit unit 250, and a cover unit 240 as main components.
 ケース270は、ケース70と同様に、樹脂等の熱伝導性を有する絶縁性の材料から成り、共に椀状の第1ケース部271と第2ケース部272とにより構成されている。第1ケース部271および第2ケース部272は、双方の椀軸がランプ軸J2とほぼ一致するように軸方向に互いに連接されている。 As with the case 70, the case 270 is made of an insulating material having thermal conductivity such as resin, and is configured by a bowl-shaped first case portion 271 and a second case portion 272. The first case portion 271 and the second case portion 272 are connected to each other in the axial direction so that the two shafts substantially coincide with the lamp shaft J2.
 第1ケース部271の内部空間には回路ユニット250が収容されている。回路ユニット250は、第1ケース部271の内部空間に収まるようにするために、回路基板251の扇形の辺と孤の大きさおよび比が回路基板51と異なり、それに合わせて回路基板251上に実装される電子部品52の配置が異なる以外は、回路ユニット50と基本的な構成は同じである。 The circuit unit 250 is accommodated in the internal space of the first case portion 271. The circuit unit 250 is different from the circuit board 51 in the size and ratio of the fan-shaped side and the arc shape of the circuit board 251 so that the circuit unit 250 fits in the internal space of the first case portion 271. The basic configuration is the same as that of the circuit unit 50 except that the arrangement of the electronic components 52 to be mounted is different.
 第1ケース部271の底部の中央は後方に延設されて突出部273となっている。突出部273の外周面には金属製のシェル部281が設けられ、突出部273の先端部には金属製のアイレット部283が設けられている。シェル部281およびアイレット部283は何れも配線53により回路ユニット250に接続されており、外部電源から電力の供給を受ける給電端子となっている。 The center of the bottom part of the first case part 271 extends rearward to form a protruding part 273. A metal shell portion 281 is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the protruding portion 273, and a metal eyelet portion 283 is provided at the distal end portion of the protruding portion 273. Each of the shell portion 281 and the eyelet portion 283 is connected to the circuit unit 250 by a wiring 53 and serves as a power supply terminal that receives supply of electric power from an external power source.
 第2ケース部272は、底部である実装基板211と、実装基板211の周縁から延設された側面部272bとにより椀状に形成されている。 The second case portion 272 is formed in a bowl shape by a mounting substrate 211 as a bottom portion and a side surface portion 272b extending from the periphery of the mounting substrate 211.
 発光部210は、実装基板211、LED12、封止体13、およびレンズ214により構成されている。 The light emitting unit 210 includes a mounting substrate 211, an LED 12, a sealing body 13, and a lens 214.
 実装基板211は、ケース270の前方側端部ではなく、第2ケース部272の底部、即ち第1ケース部と第2ケース部とが連接されている部分であるケース270の前後方向における中央部に設けられている点が実施形態1における実装基板11と異なっている以外は、基本的な構成は実装基板11と同じである。 The mounting substrate 211 is not the front end portion of the case 270, but the bottom portion of the second case portion 272, that is, the central portion in the front-rear direction of the case 270 that is a portion where the first case portion and the second case portion are connected. The basic configuration is the same as that of the mounting board 11 except that the mounting board 11 is different from the mounting board 11 in the first embodiment.
 レンズ214は、樹脂等の透光性材料からなり、封止体13を内包するように設けられている。発光部210は、発光部210の光軸と第2ケース部272の椀軸とが一致するように配置されている。 The lens 214 is made of a translucent material such as resin and is provided so as to enclose the sealing body 13. The light emitting unit 210 is disposed so that the optical axis of the light emitting unit 210 and the saddle axis of the second case unit 272 coincide.
 カバー部240は、第2ケース部272の開口部を塞ぐ前面カバー241と、前面カバー241を第2ケース部272に固定する金具242とからなる。 The cover part 240 includes a front cover 241 that closes the opening of the second case part 272 and a metal fitting 242 that fixes the front cover 241 to the second case part 272.
 図6に示すように、第2ケース部272の側面部272bには、開口部である窓部272aが複数、周方向においてほぼ等間隔に設けられている。 As shown in FIG. 6, a plurality of window portions 272 a that are openings are provided at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the side surface portion 272 b of the second case portion 272.
 ランプ200は、商業施設等に設けられたソケットに装着されて利用される。発光部210からの出射光は、第2ケース部272の開口部から前面カバー241を通じてスポットライトとして出射されるのはもちろん、第2ケース部272の側面部272bから窓部272aを通じて漏れ光として出射される。これにより、商業施設等において漏れ光を利用して空間全体の「明るさ感」や「きらめき感」を演出することができる。 The lamp 200 is used by being mounted on a socket provided in a commercial facility or the like. The light emitted from the light emitting part 210 is emitted as a spotlight from the opening of the second case part 272 through the front cover 241 as well as from the side face part 272b of the second case part 272 as leaked light through the window part 272a. Is done. As a result, it is possible to produce a “brightness feeling” and a “glittering feeling” of the entire space using leakage light in a commercial facility or the like.
 なお、図6においては、窓部272aは側面部272bの周方向において1列に配置されていたが、これに限られず、2列以上の複数列に配置しても良い。 In FIG. 6, the window portions 272a are arranged in one row in the circumferential direction of the side surface portion 272b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the window portions 272a may be arranged in two or more rows.
 また、窓部272aの形状については図6に示すような円形や楕円形に限られず、例えば、ひし形や三角形等の多角形やハート形等の形状としてもよい。 Further, the shape of the window portion 272a is not limited to a circle or an ellipse as shown in FIG. 6, and may be a polygon such as a rhombus or a triangle, or a heart shape.
 窓部272aの大きさについても、全てが同じ大きさに限られず、大きさを異ならせても良い。この場合、例えば、上記のように複数列の窓部を配置する場合には、後方側の窓部272aよりも前方側の窓部272aのほうを大きくしてもよい。これにより、スポットライトの出射方向に近い角度に多くの光を漏らすことができ、主照射領域の周囲の照度をより高めることができる。 The size of the window portion 272a is not limited to the same size, and the size may be different. In this case, for example, when a plurality of windows are arranged as described above, the front window 272a may be larger than the rear window 272a. Thereby, a lot of light can be leaked at an angle close to the emission direction of the spotlight, and the illuminance around the main irradiation region can be further increased.
 また、窓部272aは、中空の貫通孔でもよいが、例えば、樹脂、ガラス、セラミックス等の透光性部材で封塞してもよい。貫通孔を透光性部材で封塞することにより、第2ケース部272内に水分や埃などの異物が入り込むのを防止することができる。透光性部材の色については、無色としてもよいし、着色してもよい。着色した場合には透光性部材がカラーフィルタとして機能することになる。従来のハロゲン電球では反射鏡にダイクロイックフィルタを利用したものがあり、これを点灯させた場合には漏れ光の色味が特定色(例えば赤色)となる場合がある。そこで、この特定色を再現するように透光性部材を着色することにより、ランプ200のハロゲン電球への代替性をより高めることができる。 Further, the window portion 272a may be a hollow through hole, but may be sealed with a translucent member such as resin, glass, ceramics, or the like. By sealing the through hole with a translucent member, foreign matter such as moisture and dust can be prevented from entering the second case portion 272. The color of the translucent member may be colorless or colored. When colored, the translucent member functions as a color filter. Some conventional halogen light bulbs use a dichroic filter as a reflecting mirror, and when this is turned on, the color of leakage light may be a specific color (for example, red). Therefore, by substituting the translucent member so as to reproduce this specific color, the substitutability of the lamp 200 for the halogen bulb can be further enhanced.
 以上説明したように、実施形態3に係るランプ200においても、実施形態1に係るランプ1および実施形態2に係るランプ100と同様に、回路基板251は第1ケース部271の内周面271aに沿って湾曲した形状で配置されているため、回路基板251の面積を増大させることができる。これにより、第1ケース部271が小型化された場合においても、電子部品52を実装し配線パターンを形成するためのスペースを回路基板251上に確保することができる。即ち、第1ケース部271を小型化することができる。 As described above, also in the lamp 200 according to the third embodiment, the circuit board 251 is disposed on the inner peripheral surface 271a of the first case portion 271 in the same manner as the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment and the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment. Accordingly, the area of the circuit board 251 can be increased. Thereby, even when the first case portion 271 is downsized, a space for mounting the electronic component 52 and forming a wiring pattern can be secured on the circuit board 251. That is, the first case portion 271 can be reduced in size.
 加えて、実施形態3の構成においては、発光部210からの光の一部が、窓部272aを通じて漏れ光として出射され、これにより、商業施設等において漏れ光を利用して空間全体の「明るさ感」や「きらめき感」を演出することができる。 In addition, in the configuration of the third embodiment, a part of the light from the light emitting unit 210 is emitted as leaked light through the window 272a. It can produce a “feel” and a “feel”.
 <実施形態4>
 本発明の実施形態は、電球形ランプやハロゲンランプ形のランプに限られず、直管蛍光灯形のランプにも適用することができる。実施形態4においては、本発明の一態様である構成を直管形ランプに適用した場合を例に説明する。なお、説明の重複を避けるため、実施形態1,2,3と同じ構成要素については、同符号を付して、その説明を省略する。
<Embodiment 4>
Embodiments of the present invention are not limited to bulb-type lamps and halogen lamp-type lamps, but can also be applied to straight tube fluorescent lamp-type lamps. In Embodiment 4, a case where the structure of one embodiment of the present invention is applied to a straight tube lamp will be described as an example. In addition, in order to avoid duplication of description, about the same component as Embodiment 1, 2, 3, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
 図7は、実施形態4に係るランプ300の概略構成を示す図である。図7(a)は、ランプ300の側面図である。図7(b)は、ランプ300の断面図である。図7(a)および図7(b)に示すように、ランプ300は、いわゆる直管形のLEDランプであって、主な構成として、発光部310、バルブ340、回路ユニット350、ケース370、および受電部380を備える。 FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 300 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7A is a side view of the lamp 300. FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view of the lamp 300. As shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B, the lamp 300 is a so-called straight tube type LED lamp, and includes a light emitting unit 310, a bulb 340, a circuit unit 350, a case 370, as main components. And a power receiving unit 380.
 また、図8は、ランプ300からバルブ340、ケース370、受電部380を取り除いて、発光部310および回路ユニット350のみを示す斜視図である。 FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing only the light emitting unit 310 and the circuit unit 350 with the bulb 340, the case 370, and the power receiving unit 380 removed from the lamp 300. FIG.
 <発光部>
 発光部310は、長尺矩形状で平板状の実装基板311上に複数のLED312が実装基板311の長手方向に沿って列状に配設されて構成されている。
<Light emitting part>
The light emitting unit 310 includes a plurality of LEDs 312 arranged in a line along the longitudinal direction of the mounting substrate 311 on a long rectangular and flat mounting substrate 311.
 実装基板311のLED312が実装される側の主面には、金属薄膜等により配線パターンが形成されている。また、実装基板311の長手方向における両端部には、実装基板311をケース370に固定するためのネジ孔311aがそれぞれ穿設されている。 A wiring pattern is formed of a metal thin film or the like on the main surface of the mounting substrate 311 on the side where the LEDs 312 are mounted. In addition, screw holes 311 a for fixing the mounting substrate 311 to the case 370 are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the mounting substrate 311.
 本実施形態においては、LED312は、SMD(Surface Mount Device)タイプである。 In the present embodiment, the LED 312 is an SMD (Surface Mount Device) type.
 LED312は、半導体発光素子としてのLEDとそれを覆う封止体とが一つのチップとしてパッケージングされたものである。上記LEDの発光色および封止体の材料構成や波長変換特性については、それぞれLED12および封止体13と同様である。 The LED 312 is obtained by packaging an LED as a semiconductor light emitting element and a sealing body covering the LED as one chip. The light emission color of the LED, the material configuration of the sealing body, and the wavelength conversion characteristics are the same as those of the LED 12 and the sealing body 13, respectively.
 なお、本実施形態においては、SMDタイプのLED312が用いられているが、これに限られず、実施形態1~3におけるLED12のように、実装基板上に直接形成されるタイプのLEDの上に封止体13を形成したものを用いてもよい。 In the present embodiment, the SMD type LED 312 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the LED 12 in the first to third embodiments, the LED 312 is sealed on the type LED directly formed on the mounting substrate. What formed the stop 13 may be used.
 <バルブ>
 バルブ340は、長尺の円筒状に形成されている。バルブ340は、透光性を有するアクリル樹脂等の樹脂材料から形成されている。なお、バルブ340は、樹脂材料に限らず、透光性材料であればよく、例えば、ガラスやセラミックス等から形成されるものであってもよい。
<Valve>
The valve 340 is formed in a long cylindrical shape. The bulb 340 is formed from a resin material such as an acrylic resin having translucency. The valve 340 is not limited to a resin material, but may be a light-transmitting material, and may be formed from, for example, glass or ceramics.
 さらには、バルブ340は、全体が透光性を有していなくてもよい。例えば、主出射方向側(本実施形態においては、実装基板311のLED312が実装されている側。)に位置する部分のみが透光性を有し、主出射方向とは反対側に位置する部分は透光性を有していなくてもよい。また、例えば、主出射方向とは反対側に位置する部分に、ヒートパイプ(ヒートシンク)等を配設してもよい。 Furthermore, the entire bulb 340 may not have translucency. For example, only the portion located on the main emission direction side (in this embodiment, the side on which the LED 312 of the mounting substrate 311 is mounted) has translucency, and the portion located on the side opposite to the main emission direction. May not have translucency. Further, for example, a heat pipe (heat sink) or the like may be provided in a portion located on the side opposite to the main emission direction.
 また、バルブ340の内周面に、シリカ等により光拡散処理が施されていてもよい。この場合、バルブ340の内周面全体に光拡散処理が施されていなくてもよく、少なくともバルブ340の発光部310の主出射方向側に位置する部分の内周面に光拡散処理が施されていればよい。 Further, the inner peripheral surface of the bulb 340 may be subjected to light diffusion treatment with silica or the like. In this case, the entire inner peripheral surface of the bulb 340 may not be subjected to light diffusion processing, and at least the inner peripheral surface of the bulb 340 located on the main emission direction side of the light emitting unit 310 is subjected to light diffusion processing. It only has to be.
 また、さらには、バルブ340は、必ずしも円筒状でなくてもよい。例えば、多角筒状や半円筒状であってもよく、少なくとも発光部310の主出射方向側を覆う形状であればよい。 Furthermore, the valve 340 is not necessarily cylindrical. For example, a polygonal cylinder shape or a semi-cylindrical shape may be used, and any shape that covers at least the main emission direction side of the light emitting unit 310 may be used.
 <ケース>
 ケース370は、第1ケース部371および第2ケース部372から構成されている。第1ケース部371および第2ケース部372は、共に樹脂等の絶縁性の材料から成る有底筒状の部材である。第1ケース部371は、側壁部分371aおよび底部分371bから成る。第2ケース部372は、側壁部分372aおよび底部分372bから成る。
<Case>
Case 370 includes a first case portion 371 and a second case portion 372. The first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 are both bottomed cylindrical members made of an insulating material such as resin. The first case portion 371 includes a side wall portion 371a and a bottom portion 371b. The second case portion 372 includes a side wall portion 372a and a bottom portion 372b.
 第1ケース部371および第2ケース部372は、バルブ340の両端部にそれぞれ嵌着されている。 The first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 are respectively fitted to both end portions of the valve 340.
 第1ケース部371および第2ケース部372それぞれの側壁部分371aおよび372aは、バルブ340に嵌着されている側の端部である開口端側の部分における主出射方向側の部分がそれぞれ切り欠かれた形状となっている。側壁部分371aおよび側壁部分372aの筒軸方向における長さの最短はW1であり、最長はW2である。長さW1、W2は、具体的には、例えば、W1が10mm~29mmであり、W2が80mm~90mm程度である。そして、バルブ340に第1ケース部371、第2ケース部372が嵌着された状態では、側壁部分371a,372aにおける長さが最短の部分(長さW1の部分)が出射方向側に位置している。本実施形態においては、ランプ300を側方から見たときに、第1ケース部371および第2ケース部372の開口側端部が筒軸に対して斜めに直線状に切り欠かれたような形状となっている。 Side wall portions 371 a and 372 a of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 are notched in the main emission direction side portion of the opening end side portion which is the end portion on the side fitted to the bulb 340, respectively. It has become a shape. The shortest length in the tube axis direction of the side wall portion 371a and the side wall portion 372a is W1, and the longest length is W2. Specifically, the lengths W1 and W2 are, for example, W1 is 10 mm to 29 mm and W2 is about 80 mm to 90 mm. In the state where the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 are fitted to the valve 340, the side portions 371a and 372a have the shortest length portion (the length W1 portion) located on the emission direction side. ing. In the present embodiment, when the lamp 300 is viewed from the side, the opening side end portions of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 are notched linearly obliquely with respect to the cylinder axis. It has a shape.
 第1ケース部371および第2ケース部372の主出射方向側とは反対側の内周面には、実装基板311が取着される支持部331および332がそれぞれ形成されている。支持部331および332には、それぞれ貫通孔であるネジ孔331aおよび332aが穿設されている。そして、発光部310が支持部331,332によりバルブ340内に支持された状態で、ネジ333により実装基板311の両端部が支持部331,332にそれぞれ固定される。 Support portions 331 and 332 to which the mounting substrate 311 is attached are formed on the inner peripheral surfaces of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 opposite to the main emission direction side, respectively. Screw holes 331a and 332a, which are through holes, are formed in the support portions 331 and 332, respectively. Then, in a state where the light emitting unit 310 is supported in the bulb 340 by the support portions 331 and 332, both ends of the mounting substrate 311 are fixed to the support portions 331 and 332 by screws 333, respectively.
 なお、本実施形態においては、支持部331は第1ケース部371と一体的に形成されており、支持部332は第2ケース部372と一体的に形成されているが、これに限られない。支持部が別部材として形成され、ケース部に取着されてもよい。 In the present embodiment, the support portion 331 is formed integrally with the first case portion 371, and the support portion 332 is formed integrally with the second case portion 372, but is not limited thereto. . The support part may be formed as a separate member and attached to the case part.
 <受電部>
 第1ケース部371の底部分371bには、棒状のピン381が一対立設されている。第2ケース部372の底部分372bには、棒状のピン382が一対立設されている。ピン381と382とで受電部380が構成されている。ピン381およびピン382は、アルミニウムや銅等の金属から形成されており、直管蛍光灯用の照明器具に配設された一対のソケットそれぞれに接続される。
<Power receiving unit>
The bottom portion 371b of the first case portion 371 is provided with a bar-like pin 381 in an opposing manner. A rod-like pin 382 is provided opposite to the bottom portion 372 b of the second case portion 372. The pins 381 and 382 constitute a power receiving unit 380. The pins 381 and 382 are made of a metal such as aluminum or copper, and are connected to a pair of sockets provided in a lighting apparatus for a straight tube fluorescent lamp.
 なお、図7(a),(b)においては、一対のピン381のうち、奥側のピン381は手前側のピン381に隠れて見えないため、手前側のピン381のみが図示されている。同様に、一対のピン382のうち、奥側のピン382は手前側のピン382に隠れて見えないため、手前側のピン381のみが図示されている。従って、図7(a),(b)においては、ピン381および382は、それぞれ1本ずつしか図示されていないが、実際には、それぞれ2本ずつ、合計4本のピンが立設されている。 In FIGS. 7A and 7B, of the pair of pins 381, the back-side pin 381 is hidden behind the front-side pin 381 and cannot be seen, so only the front-side pin 381 is shown. . Similarly, out of the pair of pins 382, the back-side pin 382 is hidden behind the near-side pin 382 and cannot be seen, so only the near-side pin 381 is shown. Therefore, in FIGS. 7A and 7B, only one pin 381 and 382 are shown, but in actuality, a total of four pins are erected, two each. Yes.
 また、第2ケース部372の底部分372bに立設された棒状のピン382は、ランプ300を照明器具等に固定するためのものであり、外部から受電して回路ユニット350へと電力供給を行う機能は有していない。しかし、電力供給を行う役割は、ピン381に限られず、ピン381,382のどちらが担ってもよいため、ピン381とピン382とで受電部380が構成されるとし、図7(a)においては、便宜上、ピン381の側に受電部380の符号を付している。 In addition, a rod-like pin 382 provided upright on the bottom portion 372b of the second case portion 372 is for fixing the lamp 300 to a lighting fixture or the like, and receives power from outside and supplies power to the circuit unit 350. Has no function to do. However, the role of supplying power is not limited to the pin 381, and any one of the pins 381 and 382 may play a role. Therefore, it is assumed that the power receiving unit 380 is configured by the pin 381 and the pin 382, and in FIG. For convenience, the reference numeral of the power receiving unit 380 is attached to the pin 381 side.
 また、ピン381とピン382の両方が外部から受電して回路ユニットへの電力供給を行ってもよい。 Further, both the pin 381 and the pin 382 may receive power from the outside and supply power to the circuit unit.
 <回路ユニット>
 回路ユニット350は、第1回路ユニット部350aおよび第2回路ユニット部350bから成る。第1回路ユニット部350aは、回路基板351aおよび回路基板351a上に実装された各種電子部品52を備える。第2回路ユニット部350bは、回路基板351bおよび回路基板351b上に実装された各種電子部品52を備える。なお、図7(b)および図8においても、一部の電子部品52にのみ符号を付している。
<Circuit unit>
The circuit unit 350 includes a first circuit unit part 350a and a second circuit unit part 350b. The first circuit unit portion 350a includes a circuit board 351a and various electronic components 52 mounted on the circuit board 351a. The second circuit unit portion 350b includes a circuit board 351b and various electronic components 52 mounted on the circuit board 351b. In FIG. 7B and FIG. 8 as well, only some of the electronic components 52 are denoted by reference numerals.
 図7(b)および図8に示すように、回路基板351a,351bは、半円筒状に湾曲した態様で、それぞれ第1ケース部371,第2ケース部372の内部に収容されている。そして、回路基板351a,351bの湾曲の内側の主面上に電子部品52が実装されている。ピン381の第1ケース部371の内側に露出した部位には、第1回路ユニット部350aの回路基板351aから導出された配線353が半田等の導電性接合材料により接続されている。これにより、第1回路ユニット部350aは、ピン381と電気的に接続されている。 As shown in FIGS. 7B and 8, the circuit boards 351a and 351b are housed inside the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372, respectively, in a semi-cylindrical manner. And the electronic component 52 is mounted on the main surface inside the curve of the circuit boards 351a and 351b. A wiring 353 led out from the circuit board 351a of the first circuit unit portion 350a is connected to a portion of the pin 381 exposed inside the first case portion 371 by a conductive bonding material such as solder. As a result, the first circuit unit 350a is electrically connected to the pin 381.
 第1回路ユニット部350aと第2回路ユニット部350bとは、配線354により接続されている。配線354は、実装基板311のLED312が実装されていない側を通って配されているため、LED312から発せられた光を遮光しない。また、配線354の中央部分354aは縒り線となっており、配線354を流れる高周波電流による外部へのノイズ漏洩を抑制することができる。 The first circuit unit portion 350a and the second circuit unit portion 350b are connected by a wire 354. Since the wiring 354 is arranged through the side of the mounting substrate 311 where the LED 312 is not mounted, the wiring 354 does not block the light emitted from the LED 312. In addition, the central portion 354a of the wiring 354 is a twisted line, and noise leakage to the outside due to a high-frequency current flowing through the wiring 354 can be suppressed.
 第2回路ユニット部350bの回路基板351bから導出された配線355の端部にはコネクタ356が取着されており、実装基板311上に配設されたソケット357にコネクタ356が接続されることにより、第2回路ユニット部350bと発光部310とが電気的に接続される。 A connector 356 is attached to the end of the wiring 355 led out from the circuit board 351b of the second circuit unit part 350b, and the connector 356 is connected to a socket 357 disposed on the mounting board 311. The second circuit unit part 350b and the light emitting part 310 are electrically connected.
 回路基板351bの発光部310に近接している側の端部は、第2ケース部372と同様に主出射方向側が切り欠かれた形状となっている。これにより、電子部品52を実装したり配線を接続したりする実装基板の面積を若干大きく確保することができる。なお、回路基板351aは、主出射方向側が切り欠かれた形状とはなっていない。 The end of the circuit board 351b on the side close to the light emitting part 310 has a shape in which the main emission direction side is cut out in the same manner as the second case part 372. Thereby, it is possible to secure a slightly large area of the mounting substrate on which the electronic component 52 is mounted or wiring is connected. The circuit board 351a does not have a shape in which the main emission direction side is notched.
 ここで、上記のように、第1ケース部371,第2ケース部372の主出射方向側が切り欠かれた形状となっていることにより、次のような効果が得られる。 Here, as described above, since the main case direction side of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 is cut out, the following effects can be obtained.
 第1回路ユニット部350a、第2回路ユニット部350bそれぞれの一部を構成する回路基板351a,351bは、当該回路基板に実装される電子部品52の数が増加すると、その分、面積が増大してしまう。ここで、回路基板が第1ケース部371、第2ケース部372の内部に納まるように、回路基板の大きさに合わせて第1ケース部371、第2ケース部372の側壁部分の筒軸方向の長さを長くすることが考えられる。ところが、ランプの長手方向の長さは規格で決まっているため、第1ケース部371、第2ケース部372の筒軸方向の長さを長くすると、その分、バルブ340において第1ケース部371、第2ケース部372で覆われていない部分、即ち、ランプの発光部分の面積が小さくなり、非発光部分の面積が大きくなってしまう。非発光部分の面積が大きくなると、見た目の印象を悪化させることとなる。 As the number of electronic components 52 mounted on the circuit boards increases, the area of the circuit boards 351a and 351b constituting part of each of the first circuit unit part 350a and the second circuit unit part 350b increases. End up. Here, the cylindrical axis direction of the side wall portions of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 according to the size of the circuit board so that the circuit board is accommodated in the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372. It is conceivable to increase the length of. However, since the length of the lamp in the longitudinal direction is determined by the standard, if the length of the first case portion 371 and the second case portion 372 in the cylinder axis direction is increased, the first case portion 371 in the bulb 340 is correspondingly increased. The area not covered by the second case portion 372, that is, the area of the light emitting part of the lamp is reduced, and the area of the non-light emitting part is increased. When the area of the non-light emitting portion is increased, the appearance impression is deteriorated.
 これに対して、本構成によれば、回路基板351a,351bの面積が大きくなっても、上記のように主出射方向側が切り欠かれているため、LED12から発せられた光の一部が切欠き部分に到達して切欠き部分もぼんやりと光って見えるため、見た目の印象の悪化を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, according to this configuration, even if the areas of the circuit boards 351a and 351b are increased, the main emission direction side is notched as described above, so that a part of the light emitted from the LED 12 is cut off. Since the notch part is reached and the notch part shines dimly, deterioration of the visual impression can be suppressed.
 なお、回路基板351aにおいても、回路基板351bと同様に主出射方向側が切り欠かれた形状としてもよい。また、回路基板351bは、主出射方向側が切り欠かれていない形状としてもよい。 Note that the circuit board 351a may have a shape in which the main emission direction side is cut out in the same manner as the circuit board 351b. The circuit board 351b may have a shape in which the main emission direction side is not cut out.
 本実施形態においては、回路ユニット350を第1回路ユニット部350aと第2回路ユニット部350bとに2分割し、第1ケース部371および第2ケース部372の内部にそれぞれ収容した。これにより、回路ユニットを収容するためにケースの筒軸方向における長さの増大を抑制することができる。即ち、回路ユニットを分割せずにどちらか一方のケース部内に収容する場合、当該ケース部の筒軸方向の長さが増大してしまうこととなる。ケース部が長くなると、その分ランプの非発光部分が長くなり、見た目の印象の悪化を招く虞がある。さらには、ランプの一方の端部の非発光部分よりも他方の非発光部分の長さが長いと、またさらに見た目の印象を悪化させることとなる。本実施形態の構成によると、上記のような見た目の印象の悪化を抑制することができる。 In the present embodiment, the circuit unit 350 is divided into two parts, a first circuit unit part 350a and a second circuit unit part 350b, and accommodated in the first case part 371 and the second case part 372, respectively. Thereby, in order to accommodate a circuit unit, the increase in the length in the cylinder axis direction of a case can be suppressed. That is, when the circuit unit is accommodated in one of the case portions without being divided, the length of the case portion in the cylinder axis direction increases. When the case portion becomes long, the non-light-emitting portion of the lamp becomes longer correspondingly, and there is a risk of deteriorating the visual impression. Furthermore, if the length of the other non-light-emitting portion is longer than the non-light-emitting portion at one end of the lamp, the visual impression is further deteriorated. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance impression as described above.
 ただし、本実施形態に係るランプ300のように、回路ユニットを2分割して、ランプの両端部にそれぞれ配設する構成に限られない。回路ユニットのサイズが十分小さいものである場合や、見た目の印象を重視しない場合には、ランプの一方の端部に全ての回路ユニットを配してもよい。 However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the circuit unit is divided into two parts and disposed at both ends of the lamp as in the lamp 300 according to the present embodiment. When the size of the circuit unit is sufficiently small, or when the appearance impression is not important, all the circuit units may be arranged at one end of the lamp.
 以上説明したように、本実施形態に係るランプ300の構成によっても、回路基板をケース部の内周面に沿って湾曲した形状にすることにより、電子部品52を実装するための面積を増大させることができる。これにより、電子部品52を実装するのに必要な回路基板の面積を確保しつつ、ケース部を小型化することができる。また、電子部品の数が増加した場合など、回路基板の面積を増加させる場合において、ケース部のサイズ増大を抑制することができる。 As described above, even in the configuration of the lamp 300 according to the present embodiment, the area for mounting the electronic component 52 is increased by making the circuit board a curved shape along the inner peripheral surface of the case portion. be able to. Thereby, a case part can be reduced in size, ensuring the area of a circuit board required for mounting the electronic component 52. FIG. In addition, when the area of the circuit board is increased, such as when the number of electronic components is increased, an increase in the size of the case portion can be suppressed.
 <変形例>
 以上、本発明の構成を実施形態1~4に基づいて説明したが、本発明は上記実施形態に限られず、以下のような変形例を実施することができる。なお、説明の重複を避けるため、実施形態1~4と同じ構成要素については、同符号を付して、その説明を省略する。
<Modification>
The configuration of the present invention has been described based on the first to fourth embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the following modifications can be implemented. In addition, in order to avoid duplication of description, the same components as those in Embodiments 1 to 4 are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.
 <変形例1>
 図5に示す実施形態2に係るランプ100おいては、ヒートパイプ20が発光部110からの熱を受電部80へと伝えて放熱させる熱伝導部材としての役割を果たすとともに、発光部110をグローブ40内に空中配置する支持部材としての役割も果たしていた。しかし、これに限られず、ヒートパイプが熱伝導部材の役割のみを果たしてもよい。
<Modification 1>
In the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 5, the heat pipe 20 serves as a heat conducting member that transfers heat from the light emitting unit 110 to the power receiving unit 80 to dissipate the heat, and the light emitting unit 110 is used as a globe. It also played a role as a support member disposed in the air 40. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the heat pipe may serve only as a heat conducting member.
 図9は、変形例1に係るランプ400の概略構成を示す断面図である。ランプ400は、主な構成として、ケース70、発光部10、回路ユニット50、およびグローブ40を備える。ランプ400は、以下に挙げる点において実施形態2に係るランプ100と相違していることを除いては、基本的な構成はランプ100と同じである。ランプ400は、発光部10がグローブ40内に空中配置される代わりに、実施形態1に係るランプ1と同様に大径部71の前方側端部に連接して設けられている点において、ランプ100と異なっている。また、ランプ400は、ヒートパイプ420がグローブ40内にまで延出せずに、ヒートパイプ420の前方側端部が実装基板11の裏面(後方側の面)に接着剤等により固定されている点において、ランプ100と異なっている。これは、即ち言い換えると、ランプ400は、実施形態1に係るランプ1とは、ヒートパイプ320を備える点において相違している点の他は、基本的な構成はランプ1と同じであるとも言うことができる。 FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 400 according to the first modification. The lamp 400 includes a case 70, a light emitting unit 10, a circuit unit 50, and a globe 40 as main components. The basic configuration of the lamp 400 is the same as that of the lamp 100 except that the lamp 400 is different from the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment in the following points. The lamp 400 is arranged such that the light emitting unit 10 is connected to the front end portion of the large-diameter portion 71 in the same manner as the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment, instead of being disposed in the globe 40 in the air. It is different from 100. In the lamp 400, the heat pipe 420 does not extend into the globe 40, and the front end of the heat pipe 420 is fixed to the back surface (rear surface) of the mounting substrate 11 with an adhesive or the like. Is different from the lamp 100. That is, in other words, the lamp 400 is different from the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment in that the heat pipe 320 is provided, and the basic configuration is the same as that of the lamp 1. be able to.
 変形例1に係るランプ400の構成においても、回路ユニット50が大径部71内に収容される態様は、実施形態1および実施形態2と同様であるので、実施形態1および実施形態2と同様に、ケース70の小型化に資することができる。 Also in the configuration of the lamp 400 according to the first modification, the manner in which the circuit unit 50 is accommodated in the large-diameter portion 71 is the same as in the first and second embodiments, and thus is the same as in the first and second embodiments. In addition, the case 70 can be reduced in size.
 さらに、ヒートパイプ420により発光部10の熱を受電部80へと伝導させて放熱させることにより、発光部110の放熱性を向上させることができる。 Furthermore, the heat radiation of the light emitting unit 110 can be improved by conducting the heat of the light emitting unit 10 to the power receiving unit 80 by the heat pipe 420 to dissipate the heat.
 <変形例2>
 図10は、変形例2に係るランプ500の概略構成を示す断面図である。ランプ500は、ヒートパイプ520の周面に凹部521が形成されている点を除いては、基本的な構成は、実施形態2に係るランプ100と同じである。
<Modification 2>
FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 500 according to the second modification. The basic configuration of the lamp 500 is the same as that of the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment, except that the concave portion 521 is formed on the peripheral surface of the heat pipe 520.
 凹部521は、電子部品52aに対応する位置に形成されており、電子部品52aの一部が凹部521内に位置している。このとき、電子部品52aが凹部521の凹入面に接触することにより、電子部品52aにおいて発生した熱がヒートパイプ520へと伝導し、ヒートパイプ520を介して受電部80へと放熱される。この場合、凹部521の凹入面に絶縁被膜を形成する等の処理を施してもよい。 The recess 521 is formed at a position corresponding to the electronic component 52 a, and a part of the electronic component 52 a is located in the recess 521. At this time, when the electronic component 52 a comes into contact with the recessed surface of the recess 521, heat generated in the electronic component 52 a is conducted to the heat pipe 520 and is radiated to the power receiving unit 80 via the heat pipe 520. In this case, a treatment such as forming an insulating film on the recessed surface of the recessed portion 521 may be performed.
 また、電子部品52aの一部が凹部521内に位置していることにより、回路基板51の後方側端部51cが底面177から離脱した場合においても、電子部品52aが凹部521に当接して回路ユニット50がケース170内部で移動するのを抑制することができる。これにより、配線が断線したり、電子部品52が回路基板51から脱離したりといった問題の発生を抑制することができる。 In addition, since a part of the electronic component 52a is located in the recess 521, the electronic component 52a contacts the recess 521 even when the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51 is detached from the bottom surface 177. It is possible to suppress the unit 50 from moving inside the case 170. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as disconnection of wiring or separation of the electronic component 52 from the circuit board 51.
 <変形例3>
 図11は、変形例3に係るランプ600の概略構成を示す断面図である。図11に示すように、ヒートパイプ620の外周面において、周方向の全周に亘って一続きの凹部621が形成されていてもよい。
<Modification 3>
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 600 according to the third modification. As shown in FIG. 11, a continuous recess 621 may be formed on the outer peripheral surface of the heat pipe 620 over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction.
 ランプ600の構成によっても、変形例2に係るランプ500の場合と同様に、電子部品52aにおいて発生した熱が、凹部621からヒートパイプ620へと伝わり、そこから受電部80へと放熱させることができる。 Also in the configuration of the lamp 600, as in the case of the lamp 500 according to the second modification, the heat generated in the electronic component 52a is transmitted from the concave portion 621 to the heat pipe 620, and is radiated from there to the power receiving unit 80. it can.
 また、回路基板51の後方側端部51cが底面177から離脱した場合においても、回路ユニット50がケース170内部で移動するのを抑制することができる。 Further, even when the rear side end 51 c of the circuit board 51 is detached from the bottom surface 177, it is possible to suppress the circuit unit 50 from moving inside the case 170.
 <変形例4>
 実施形態1および変形例1においては、実装基板11がケース70と一体的に形成されていた。しかし、これに限られない。図12は、変形例4に係るランプ700の概略構成を示す断面図である。図12に示すように、ランプ700は、実装基板711がケース770とは独立した別部材として設けられている点においてランプ1と相違している。またさらに、大径部771の前方側端部773に実装基板711を固定するための突起部778がランプ軸J1へと向かう方向に突出して設けられている点においてランプ1と相違している。上記2点において相違している以外は、ランプ700は、基本的な構成はランプ1と同じである。ランプ700における大径部771、小径部772、前方側端部773、溝部774、後方側開口775、および底面777は、それぞれ、ランプ1における大径部71、小径部72、前方側端部73、溝部74、後方側開口75、および底面77に相当する。実装基板711、LED12、および封止体13により発光部710が構成される。
<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment and the first modification, the mounting substrate 11 is formed integrally with the case 70. However, it is not limited to this. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 700 according to the fourth modification. As shown in FIG. 12, the lamp 700 is different from the lamp 1 in that the mounting substrate 711 is provided as a separate member independent of the case 770. Furthermore, the lamp 1 differs from the lamp 1 in that a projection 778 for fixing the mounting substrate 711 to the front end 773 of the large-diameter portion 771 protrudes in the direction toward the lamp axis J1. The lamp 700 has the same basic configuration as the lamp 1 except for the differences in the above two points. The large diameter portion 771, the small diameter portion 772, the front end portion 773, the groove portion 774, the rear opening 775, and the bottom surface 777 of the lamp 700 are respectively the large diameter portion 71, the small diameter portion 72, and the front end portion 73 in the lamp 1. , Corresponding to the groove 74, the rear opening 75, and the bottom surface 77. The mounting substrate 711, the LED 12, and the sealing body 13 constitute a light emitting unit 710.
 本変形例に係るランプ700の構成によると、実装基板711がケース770とは別部材として形成されているため、実装基板711をケース770の突起部778に取着するのに先立って、ケース770の前方側開口776から回路ユニット50を大径部771の内部に挿入することができる。前方側開口776は、後方側開口775よりも大きいため、回路ユニット50のケース770内部への挿入および固定が容易である。また、回路ユニット50を小さく丸めなくてもケース770内に挿入できるため、電子部品52の損傷リスクを低減することができる。さらには、回路ユニット50を小さく丸めなくてよいため、回路基板51上の電子部品の実装密度を増加させることができ、小型化により有利である。 According to the configuration of the lamp 700 according to this modification, the mounting substrate 711 is formed as a separate member from the case 770, and therefore, the case 770 is attached before the mounting substrate 711 is attached to the protrusion 778 of the case 770. The circuit unit 50 can be inserted into the large diameter portion 771 from the front opening 776. Since the front opening 776 is larger than the rear opening 775, the circuit unit 50 can be easily inserted into and fixed to the case 770. Moreover, since the circuit unit 50 can be inserted into the case 770 without being rounded down, the risk of damage to the electronic component 52 can be reduced. Furthermore, since the circuit unit 50 does not have to be rounded down, the mounting density of electronic components on the circuit board 51 can be increased, which is advantageous for downsizing.
 <変形例5>
 上記変形例4に係るランプ700においては、実装基板711がケース770と一体的に形成されていないため、組み付けに際しては、大径部771内に回路ユニット50を収容した後に実装基板711を突起部778に固定することができる。これにより、回路ユニット50を大径部771内部に固定する方法についての自由度をより大きくすることができる。
<Modification 5>
In the lamp 700 according to the modified example 4, since the mounting substrate 711 is not integrally formed with the case 770, the mounting substrate 711 is protruded after the circuit unit 50 is accommodated in the large diameter portion 771 when assembled. 778. Thereby, the freedom degree about the method of fixing the circuit unit 50 inside the large diameter part 771 can be enlarged more.
 図13は、変形例5に係るランプ800の概略構成を示す断面図である。ケース870の底面877には、回路基板51の後方側端部51cを固定するための溝部877aが形成されている。実装基板711がケース870とは別部材であるため、実装基板711がケース870に取着される前に、回路ユニット50をケース870の前方側開口876からケース870内部に挿入することができる。その際に、回路基板51の後方側端部51cを溝部877aに挿嵌して回路ユニット50をケース870に固定することができる。また、溝部877a内部に接着剤等を塗布した後、回路基板51の後方側端部51cを嵌入して回路ユニット50を大径部871内部に固定してもよい。そしてその後、突起部878上面に接着剤等を塗布した後に実装基板711が載置され、実装基板711がケース870に固定的に取着され、前方側開口876が実装基板711により閉塞される。 FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 800 according to the fifth modification. On the bottom surface 877 of the case 870, a groove portion 877a for fixing the rear side end portion 51c of the circuit board 51 is formed. Since the mounting substrate 711 is a separate member from the case 870, the circuit unit 50 can be inserted into the case 870 from the front opening 876 of the case 870 before the mounting substrate 711 is attached to the case 870. At that time, the circuit unit 50 can be fixed to the case 870 by inserting the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51 into the groove 877a. Alternatively, after applying an adhesive or the like inside the groove portion 877a, the rear side end portion 51c of the circuit board 51 may be fitted to fix the circuit unit 50 inside the large diameter portion 871. Then, after mounting an adhesive or the like on the upper surface of the protruding portion 878, the mounting substrate 711 is placed, the mounting substrate 711 is fixedly attached to the case 870, and the front opening 876 is closed by the mounting substrate 711.
 なお、ケース870は、溝部877aが形成されている点以外は、基本的な構成はケース770と同じである。ランプ800における大径部871、小径部872、前方側端部873、溝部874、後方側開口875、底面877、および突起部878は、それぞれ、ランプ700における大径部771、小径部772、前方側端部773、溝部774、後方側開口775、底面777、および突起部778に相当する。 The basic configuration of the case 870 is the same as that of the case 770 except that the groove 877a is formed. The large diameter portion 871, the small diameter portion 872, the front side end portion 873, the groove portion 874, the rear side opening 875, the bottom surface 877, and the projection portion 878 in the lamp 800 are respectively the large diameter portion 771, the small diameter portion 772, and the front portion. It corresponds to the side end 773, the groove 774, the rear side opening 775, the bottom 777, and the protrusion 778.
 <変形例6>
 また、変形例5においては、回路基板を大径部の底面に設けた溝部に嵌着させて固定する構成について説明した。しかし、溝部が設けられる箇所としてはこれに限られず、大径部の内側の面であればいずれの箇所であってもよい。例えば、大径部の内周面に縦方向(前後方向)に溝を形成し、当該溝に回路基板51の側端部(扇形の辺に相当する部分)を圧入により嵌着させて回路ユニット50を大径部内部に固定してもよい。
<Modification 6>
Moreover, in the modification 5, the structure which fitted and fixed the circuit board in the groove part provided in the bottom face of the large diameter part was demonstrated. However, the location where the groove is provided is not limited to this, and may be any location as long as it is a surface inside the large diameter portion. For example, a circuit unit is formed by forming a groove in the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) on the inner peripheral surface of the large-diameter portion, and press-fitting a side end portion (a portion corresponding to a fan-shaped side) of the circuit board 51 into the groove. 50 may be fixed inside the large diameter portion.
 <変形例7>
 図14は、変形例7に係るランプ900の概略構成を示す断面図である。同図に示すように、円筒形の筒状部材954の内周面954bに回路基板951の外周面が貼付され、筒状部材954の後方側端部954cは、ケース870の底面877に形成された溝部877aに嵌着され、固定されている。
<Modification 7>
FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 900 according to Modification 7. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the outer peripheral surface of the circuit board 951 is affixed to the inner peripheral surface 954 b of the cylindrical tubular member 954, and the rear side end portion 954 c of the cylindrical member 954 is formed on the bottom surface 877 of the case 870. The groove portion 877a is fitted and fixed.
 回路ユニット950は、回路基板951が円筒形の筒状部材954の内周面954bにフィットするように、平面に展開した場合に矩形状である点が回路基板51と相違している以外は、基本的な構成は回路ユニット50と同じである。回路基板951上には、各種電子部品52が実装され、不図示の配線パターンが形成されている。 The circuit unit 950 is different from the circuit board 51 in that the circuit board 951 is rectangular when deployed in a plane so that the circuit board 951 fits the inner peripheral surface 954b of the cylindrical tubular member 954. The basic configuration is the same as that of the circuit unit 50. On the circuit board 951, various electronic components 52 are mounted, and a wiring pattern (not shown) is formed.
 <変形例8>
 実施形態1~4および変形例1~7においては、全ての電子部品が回路基板の内周面上に実装されていたが、これに限られない。
<Modification 8>
In Embodiments 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 to 7, all electronic components are mounted on the inner peripheral surface of the circuit board. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
 図15は、変形例8に係るランプ1000の概略構成を示す断面図である。同図に示すように、電子部品52の一部は、回路基板1051の外周面1051aに実装されている。即ち、回路基板1051の外周面1051aにも内周面1051bにも電子部品52が実装されている。 FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 1000 according to Modification 8. As shown in the figure, a part of the electronic component 52 is mounted on the outer peripheral surface 1051 a of the circuit board 1051. That is, the electronic component 52 is mounted on both the outer peripheral surface 1051a and the inner peripheral surface 1051b of the circuit board 1051.
 本変形例に係るランプ1000のように、回路基板1051の外周面1051aと内周面1051bの両方に電子部品を配置することにより、回路基板の一方の主面に全ての電子部品を実装する場合と比較して、1つの主面上に実装する電子部品の数が少なくなるため、その分回路基板の面積を低減することができる。即ち、回路基板のランプ軸J1方向における長さを短くすることができ、ケースのランプ軸J1方向における長さを短くすることができる。 When all electronic components are mounted on one main surface of the circuit board by arranging electronic components on both the outer peripheral surface 1051a and the inner peripheral surface 1051b of the circuit board 1051 as in the lamp 1000 according to this modification. Since the number of electronic components mounted on one main surface is reduced, the area of the circuit board can be reduced accordingly. That is, the length of the circuit board in the lamp axis J1 direction can be shortened, and the length of the case in the lamp axis J1 direction can be shortened.
 このとき、図15に示すように、比較的背の高い電子部品52aを回路基板1051の内周面1051b上に実装し、比較的背の低い電子部品52を外周面1051a上に実装するようにすると、回路基板1051をケース1070の大径部1071の内周面1071aにより近接して配置することができ、回路基板1051の面積をできるだけ大きくすることができる。 At this time, as shown in FIG. 15, the relatively tall electronic component 52a is mounted on the inner peripheral surface 1051b of the circuit board 1051, and the relatively short electronic component 52 is mounted on the outer peripheral surface 1051a. Then, the circuit board 1051 can be disposed closer to the inner peripheral surface 1071a of the large-diameter portion 1071 of the case 1070, and the area of the circuit board 1051 can be made as large as possible.
 なお、本変形例におけるケース1070は、ランプ軸J1方向における長さが比較的短い点をのぞいては、基本的な構成は、変形例4に係るランプ700のケース770と同じである。ケース1070における大径部1071、小径部1072、前方側端部1073、後方側開口1075、前方側開口1076、底面1077、および突起部1078は、それぞれ、ランプ700における大径部771、小径部772、前方側端部773、後方側開口775、前方側開口776、底面777、および突起部778に相当する。 The basic configuration of the case 1070 in the present modified example is the same as that of the case 770 of the lamp 700 according to the modified example 4 except that the length in the lamp axis J1 direction is relatively short. The large-diameter portion 1071, the small-diameter portion 1072, the front-side end portion 1073, the rear-side opening 1075, the front-side opening 1076, the bottom surface 1077, and the protrusion 1078 in the case 1070 are the large-diameter portion 771 and the small-diameter portion 772 in the lamp 700, respectively. , Corresponding to the front side end 773, the rear side opening 775, the front side opening 776, the bottom surface 777, and the protrusion 778.
 <変形例9>
 また、比較的背の高い電子部品52aを回路基板の外周面に実装してもよい。図16は、変形例9に係るランプ1100の概略構成を示す断面図である。図16に示すように、ランプ1100においては、電子部品52aは、回路基板1151の外周面1151a上に実装されている。この場合、図16に示すように、大径部1071の内径の大きな前方側に電子部品52aを配するとよい。前方側に電子部品52aに配されているため、回路基板1151は、湾曲して大径部1071内部に収容されている状態において、前方側ほど径が小さい形状となっている。回路基板1151は平面に展開された状態においては、図4に示す回路基板51と同様に扇形の形状を有しており、ケース内部においては、扇の円弧の短い方を前方側にした状態で収容されている。また、比較的背の低い電子部品52については、その全部を回路基板1151の内周面1151b上に実装しても良いし、一部を外周面1151a上に実装してもよい。
<Modification 9>
Alternatively, a relatively tall electronic component 52a may be mounted on the outer peripheral surface of the circuit board. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 1100 according to Modification 9. As shown in FIG. 16, in the lamp 1100, the electronic component 52 a is mounted on the outer peripheral surface 1151 a of the circuit board 1151. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16, the electronic component 52a may be disposed on the front side where the large-diameter portion 1071 has a large inner diameter. Since the electronic component 52a is disposed on the front side, the circuit board 1151 has a shape with a smaller diameter toward the front side in a state where the circuit board 1151 is curved and accommodated inside the large diameter portion 1071. In a state where the circuit board 1151 is developed in a plane, it has a fan-like shape like the circuit board 51 shown in FIG. 4, and inside the case, the shorter one of the arcs of the fan is in the front side. Contained. Further, all of the relatively short electronic components 52 may be mounted on the inner peripheral surface 1151b of the circuit board 1151, or a part thereof may be mounted on the outer peripheral surface 1151a.
 <変形例10>
 さらには、変形例8および変形例9の構成において、大径部1071の内周面1071aに電子部品52や回路基板51を係止する突起を設けることにより回路ユニットを大径部1071内部に固定してもよい。
<Modification 10>
Further, in the configurations of the modification examples 8 and 9, the circuit unit is fixed inside the large-diameter portion 1071 by providing a protrusion for locking the electronic component 52 and the circuit board 51 on the inner peripheral surface 1071a of the large-diameter portion 1071. May be.
 <変形例11>
 また、湾曲した回路基板の対向する辺(扇形の辺に相当する端縁)を接続して円筒形状としてもよい。変形例11では、回路基板の対向する2辺を接続して円筒状となった回路ユニットを、直管形LEDランプに適用した場合を例に説明する。
<Modification 11>
Further, the opposing sides of the curved circuit board (end edges corresponding to the fan-shaped sides) may be connected to form a cylindrical shape. In the modification 11, a case where a circuit unit that is formed in a cylindrical shape by connecting two opposite sides of a circuit board is applied to a straight tube LED lamp will be described as an example.
 図17は、変形例11に係るランプ1200を示す図である。図17(a)は、ランプ1200の側面図であり、図17(b)は、ランプ1200の断面図である。ランプ1200においては、第1ケース部1271が有底筒状部分1271aと無底筒状部分1271bとから構成されており、第2ケース部1272が有底筒状部分1272aと無底筒状部分1272bとから構成されている。 FIG. 17 is a view showing a lamp 1200 according to the eleventh modification. FIG. 17A is a side view of the lamp 1200, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the lamp 1200. In the lamp 1200, the first case portion 1271 includes a bottomed cylindrical portion 1271a and a bottomless cylindrical portion 1271b, and the second case portion 1272 includes a bottomed cylindrical portion 1272a and a bottomless cylindrical portion 1272b. It consists of and.
 第1ケース部1271内部には、円筒状の回路基板1251aの内周面上に各種電子部品52が実装されて成る第1回路ユニット部1250aが収容されている。第2ケース部1272の内部には、円筒状の回路基板1251bの内周面上に各種電子部品52が実装されて成る第2回路ユニット部1250bが収容されている。第1回路ユニット部1250aおよび第2回路ユニット部1250bにより回路ユニット1250が構成される。 The first case unit 1271 accommodates a first circuit unit unit 1250a in which various electronic components 52 are mounted on the inner peripheral surface of a cylindrical circuit board 1251a. The second case unit 1272 houses a second circuit unit unit 1250b in which various electronic components 52 are mounted on the inner peripheral surface of a cylindrical circuit board 1251b. The first circuit unit portion 1250a and the second circuit unit portion 1250b constitute a circuit unit 1250.
 回路基板1251aの発光部310側の端部は、支持部1231により発光部310に近接する方向への移動が規制されている。また、回路基板1251bの発光部310側の端部は、支持部1232により発光部310に近接する方向への移動が規制されている。 The movement of the end portion of the circuit board 1251a on the light emitting unit 310 side in the direction of approaching the light emitting unit 310 is restricted by the support unit 1231. Further, the movement of the end portion of the circuit board 1251b on the light emitting unit 310 side in the direction of approaching the light emitting unit 310 is restricted by the support unit 1232.
 また、第1ケース部1271内部空間の内径と、回路基板1251aの外径とは対応している。そして、第2ケース部1272内部空間の内径と、回路基板1251bの外径とは対応している。 Further, the inner diameter of the internal space of the first case portion 1271 corresponds to the outer diameter of the circuit board 1251a. The inner diameter of the internal space of the second case portion 1272 corresponds to the outer diameter of the circuit board 1251b.
 これにより、ランプ1200を搬送する際に、第1ケース部1271および第2ケース部1272内部において第1回路ユニット部1250aおよび第2回路ユニット部1250bが移動することによって引き起こされる回路部品の破損や配線の断線を抑制することができる。 As a result, when the lamp 1200 is transported, damage to circuit components or wiring caused by the movement of the first circuit unit 1250a and the second circuit unit 1250b inside the first case 1271 and the second case 1272 Can be suppressed.
 また、第1ケース部1271および第2ケース部1272がそれぞれ有底筒状部分と無底筒状部分とから構成されているため、第1回路ユニット部1250aおよび第2回路ユニット部1250bを、第1ケース部1271および第2ケース部1272内にそれぞれ収容するのが容易である。具体的には、第1回路ユニット部1250aを無底筒状部分1271b内に挿入してから、有底筒状部分1271aを被せて有底筒状部分1271aを無底筒状部分1271bに取着することにより、第1ケース部1271内部に第1回路ユニット部1250aが収容される。有底筒状部分1271aの無底筒状部分1271bへの取着は、接着剤を用いて行ってもよいし、爪状部材等の係合構造を利用してもよい。第2回路ユニット部1250bの第2ケース部1272内部への収容および、有底筒状部分1272aの無底筒状部分1272bへの取着についても、上記と同様にして行われる。 In addition, since the first case portion 1271 and the second case portion 1272 are each composed of a bottomed cylindrical portion and a bottomless cylindrical portion, the first circuit unit portion 1250a and the second circuit unit portion 1250b are It is easy to accommodate the first case portion 1271 and the second case portion 1272 respectively. Specifically, after the first circuit unit portion 1250a is inserted into the bottomless cylindrical portion 1271b, the bottomed cylindrical portion 1271a is covered and the bottomed cylindrical portion 1271a is attached to the bottomless cylindrical portion 1271b. Thus, the first circuit unit portion 1250a is accommodated in the first case portion 1271. Attachment of the bottomed cylindrical portion 1271a to the bottomless cylindrical portion 1271b may be performed using an adhesive, or an engagement structure such as a claw-shaped member may be used. The housing of the second circuit unit portion 1250b in the second case portion 1272 and the attachment of the bottomed tubular portion 1272a to the bottomless tubular portion 1272b are performed in the same manner as described above.
 なお、回路基板がケース内周面に接着剤や粘着剤等を用いて固定されていてもよい。 In addition, the circuit board may be fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the case using an adhesive or an adhesive.
 <変形例12>
 実施形態4に係るランプ300および変形例11に係るランプ1200のように、本発明の一態様を直管形ランプに適用した場合において、第1ケース部、第2ケース部の切欠きは、側面視において直線的に切り欠かれていなくてもよい。
<Modification 12>
In the case where one aspect of the present invention is applied to a straight tube lamp like the lamp 300 according to the fourth embodiment and the lamp 1200 according to the modification 11, the cutouts of the first case portion and the second case portion are side surfaces. It may not be cut out linearly in view.
 図18は、変形例12に係るランプ1300の側面図である。同図に示すように、ランプ1300においては、第1ケース部1371および第2ケース部1372の側面の主出射方向側の部分がそれぞれ曲線的に切り欠かれている。第1ケース部1371および第2ケース部1372によりケース1370が構成される。 FIG. 18 is a side view of a lamp 1300 according to Modification 12. As shown in the figure, in the lamp 1300, the main emission direction side portions of the side surfaces of the first case portion 1371 and the second case portion 1372 are cut out in a curved manner. The first case portion 1371 and the second case portion 1372 form a case 1370.
 <変形例13>
 実施形態2に係るランプ100においては、実装基板111は平板状であったが、これに限られない。
<Modification 13>
In the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment, the mounting substrate 111 has a flat plate shape, but is not limited thereto.
 図19は、変形例13に係るランプ1400の概略構成を示す断面図である。ランプ1400は、ヒートパイプ1420の前方側端部に四角錐台形状を有する基台部1422が一体的に形成されている。また、基台部1422の上面および側面には、実装基板1411上にLED312が実装された発光部1410が取着されている。ランプ1400は、実施形態2に係るランプ100と上記の2点において相違していること以外は、基本的な構成はランプ100と同じである。 FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1400 according to Modification 13. The lamp 1400 is integrally formed with a base portion 1422 having a quadrangular pyramid shape at the front end portion of the heat pipe 1420. Further, a light emitting unit 1410 in which an LED 312 is mounted on a mounting substrate 1411 is attached to the upper surface and side surfaces of the base unit 1422. The basic configuration of the lamp 1400 is the same as that of the lamp 100 except that the lamp 1400 is different from the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment in the above two points.
 ここでは、ヒートパイプ1420と基台部1422とで発光部1410をグローブ40内に支持する支持部材の役割を果たしている。ヒートパイプ1420が受電部80に対して固定される支持本体部である。 Here, the heat pipe 1420 and the base part 1422 serve as a support member that supports the light emitting part 1410 in the globe 40. The heat pipe 1420 is a support main body portion that is fixed to the power receiving unit 80.
 <変形例14>
 図20は、変形例14に係るランプ1500の概略構成を示す断面図である。図20に示すランプ1500のように、基台部1522がヒートパイプ20とは別部材として形成されていてもよい。また、ランプ1500のように、LED312が実装基板上ではなく、基台部1522上に直接実装されていてもよい。この場合、基台部1522は、樹脂やセラミック等の材料から形成されるのがよい。また、不図示の配線パターンも基台部1522上に直接形成されている。
<Modification 14>
FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a lamp 1500 according to Modification Example 14. As in the lamp 1500 shown in FIG. 20, the base portion 1522 may be formed as a separate member from the heat pipe 20. Further, like the lamp 1500, the LED 312 may be directly mounted on the base portion 1522 instead of on the mounting substrate. In this case, the base portion 1522 is preferably formed from a material such as resin or ceramic. A wiring pattern (not shown) is also directly formed on the base portion 1522.
 変形例14に係るランプ1500の場合においては、基台部1522は、支持部材としての役割に加えて実装基板としての役割も兼ねているため、LED312と基台部1522とで発光部1510を構成していると捉えることができる。また、基台部1522を熱伝導性の樹脂等を用いて形成し、基台部1522が熱伝導部材としての機能を更に兼ねてもよい。 In the case of the lamp 1500 according to the modified example 14, since the base portion 1522 also serves as a mounting substrate in addition to the role as a support member, the light emitting portion 1510 is configured by the LED 312 and the base portion 1522. Can be seen as doing. Further, the base portion 1522 may be formed using a heat conductive resin or the like, and the base portion 1522 may further function as a heat conductive member.
 <変形例15>
 図21は、変形例15に係るランプ1600の概略構成を示す断面図である。図21に示すように、基台部1622は、逆四角錐台形状であってもよい。ランプ1600のように基台部1622が逆四角錐台形状である場合、基台部1622の側面上に実装されたLED312からの光は、ランプ1600の後方側へと出射されることとなり、ランプの配光特性を向上させることができる。
<Modification 15>
FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1600 according to Modification 15. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the base portion 1622 may have an inverted quadrangular pyramid shape. When the base portion 1622 has an inverted quadrangular pyramid shape like the lamp 1600, the light from the LED 312 mounted on the side surface of the base portion 1622 is emitted to the rear side of the lamp 1600. It is possible to improve the light distribution characteristics.
 なお、ランプ1600においては、LED312は基台部1622表面に直接実装されている。従って、基台部1622は、実装基板としての機能も兼ねており、LED312と基台部1622とで発光部1610を構成していると捉えることができる。また、この場合、基台部1622は樹脂やセラミック等の材料から形成されており、ヒートパイプ1620と基台部1622とが一体的に形成されているため、ヒートパイプ1620も樹脂やセラミック等の材料から形成されていると、製造が容易である。その場合は、良好な熱伝導性を有する材料を用いるとよい。 In the lamp 1600, the LED 312 is directly mounted on the surface of the base portion 1622. Accordingly, the base portion 1622 also functions as a mounting substrate, and it can be considered that the light emitting portion 1610 is configured by the LED 312 and the base portion 1622. In this case, since the base portion 1622 is formed of a material such as resin or ceramic, and the heat pipe 1620 and the base portion 1622 are integrally formed, the heat pipe 1620 is also made of resin, ceramic, or the like. Manufacturing from the material is easy. In that case, a material having good thermal conductivity may be used.
 なお、ランプ1600においては、基台部1622はヒートパイプ1620の前方側端部に一体的に形成されているが、これに限られず、基台部1622が別部材としてヒートパイプ1620に取着されていてもよい。 In the lamp 1600, the base portion 1622 is integrally formed at the front end portion of the heat pipe 1620. However, the base portion 1622 is not limited to this and is attached to the heat pipe 1620 as a separate member. It may be.
 また、ランプ1600においては、LED312が基台部1622の表面に直接実装されていたが、これに限られない。例えば、LEDが実装されたフレキシブル基板等から成る実装基板を基台部1622の表面に貼付してもよい。 In the lamp 1600, the LED 312 is directly mounted on the surface of the base portion 1622. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a mounting board made of a flexible board or the like on which LEDs are mounted may be attached to the surface of the base portion 1622.
 <変形例16>
 変形例13,14,15に係るランプ1400,1500,1600のように、四角錐台形状を有する基台部の表面にLEDが直接または実装基板を介して実装された発光部を有する場合、基台部の側面に実装されたLEDは、グローブからの距離が近いため、ユーザが側方からランプを見た場合に、LEDからの光がギラついて見えることが考えられる。そのようなギラつきを抑制するために、例えば、グローブの厚さを変化させてもよい。
<Modification 16>
In the case where the LED has a light emitting part mounted directly or via a mounting substrate on the surface of the base part having a quadrangular pyramid shape like the lamps 1400, 1500, 1600 according to the modified examples 13, 14, 15 Since the LED mounted on the side surface of the pedestal is close to the globe, it can be considered that when the user looks at the lamp from the side, the light from the LED appears glaring. In order to suppress such glare, for example, the thickness of the glove may be changed.
 図22は、変形例16に係るランプ1700の概略構成を示す断面図である。図22に示すように、ランプ1700においては、グローブ1740の基台部1422の側面1422aに実装されたLED312aに近接した部分である側方部分1743の厚さが厚くなっており、天面部分1744へと向かうにつれて厚さが減少している。これにより、LED312aから側方に発せられた光がグローブ1740の側方部分1743を通過する間に弱められたり拡散したりしてギラつきが軽減される。 FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1700 according to Modification 16. As shown in FIG. 22, in the lamp 1700, the thickness of the side portion 1743 that is a portion close to the LED 312 a mounted on the side surface 1422 a of the base portion 1422 of the globe 1740 is increased, and the top surface portion 1744 is increased. The thickness decreases as it goes to. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 312a to the side is weakened or diffused while passing through the side portion 1743 of the globe 1740, thereby reducing glare.
 なお、LED312aについては、側面1422aに実装されているLEDとその他のLEDとを区別するために便宜的に異なる符号を付したものであって、LED312とLED312aとは、実装されている基台部上の位置が異なる以外は、全く同じものである。以下、変形例17,18においても、同様である。 Note that the LED 312a is given a different reference for the sake of convenience in order to distinguish the LED mounted on the side surface 1422a from the other LEDs, and the LED 312 and the LED 312a are mounted on the base portion. Except for the difference in the upper position, it is exactly the same. The same applies to the modified examples 17 and 18 below.
 <変形例17>
 さらには、LEDのギラつきを軽減するために、グローブの側方部分における内面に、光拡散処理を施してもよい。
<Modification 17>
Furthermore, in order to reduce glare of the LED, a light diffusion process may be performed on the inner surface of the side portion of the globe.
 図23は、変形例17に係るランプ1800の概略構成を示す断面図である。図23に示すように、ランプ1800のグローブ1840は、側方部分1843の内面である側方内面1843aに光拡散処理が施されている。具体的には、側方内面1843aには、微小な窪み(または凹凸)が多数形成された、いわゆるフロスト加工が施されている。 FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1800 according to Modification 17. As shown in FIG. 23, in the globe 1840 of the lamp 1800, a light diffusion process is performed on the side inner surface 1843a that is the inner surface of the side portion 1843. Specifically, the side inner surface 1843a is subjected to so-called frost processing in which a large number of minute depressions (or irregularities) are formed.
 なお、上記微小な窪みそれぞれの凹入面にさらに微小な窪みが多数形成された構成としてもよい。 In addition, it is good also as a structure by which many fine dents were further formed in the recessed surface of each said fine dent.
 <変形例18>
 図24は、変形例18に係るランプ1900の概略構成を示す断面図である。図24に示すように、グローブ40の側方部分43における側方内面43a上に光拡散層1944を形成してもよい。光拡散層1944は、例えば、無色透明のポリマーにシリカ等を混濁させた混濁液を側方内面43aに塗布して形成してもよい。
<Modification 18>
FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 1900 according to Modification 18. As shown in FIG. 24, a light diffusion layer 1944 may be formed on the side inner surface 43 a of the side portion 43 of the globe 40. The light diffusion layer 1944 may be formed, for example, by applying a turbid liquid in which a colorless transparent polymer is made turbid with silica or the like to the side inner surface 43a.
 また、透光性、光拡散性、および可撓性を有するフィルム状の部材を側方内面43aに貼付してもよい。さらには、表面または内部に光拡散処理を施した透光性の筒状の部材をグローブ40の側方部分43の内側に配置してもよい。 Further, a film-like member having translucency, light diffusibility, and flexibility may be attached to the side inner surface 43a. Furthermore, a translucent cylindrical member having a light diffusion treatment applied to the surface or the inside may be disposed inside the side portion 43 of the globe 40.
 <変形例19>
 上記変形例13,16,17,18においては、実装基板1411はフレキシブル基板等の可撓性を有する材料から成るが、これに限られない。実装基板が可撓性を有しない樹脂やセラミック等の材料から形成されていてもよい。また、実装基板は、複数パーツを組み合わせて構成されてもよい。
<Modification 19>
In the modified examples 13, 16, 17, and 18, the mounting substrate 1411 is made of a flexible material such as a flexible substrate, but is not limited thereto. The mounting substrate may be formed from a material such as resin or ceramic that does not have flexibility. Further, the mounting substrate may be configured by combining a plurality of parts.
 <変形例20>
 図25は、変形例20に係るランプ2000の概略構成を示す断面図である。ランプ2000は、実装基板2011の裏面上に円形もしくは一部が開いたC環状の溝部2011aが形成されている点において、変形例4に係るランプ700と相違している。上記の点においてランプ700と相違している以外は、ランプ2000は、基本的な構成はランプ700と同じである。
<Modification 20>
FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 2000 according to Modification 20. The lamp 2000 is different from the lamp 700 according to the modification 4 in that a circular or partly C-shaped groove 2011a is formed on the back surface of the mounting substrate 2011. Except for the difference from the lamp 700 in the above points, the lamp 2000 has the same basic configuration as the lamp 700.
 図25に示すように、実装基板2011の裏面上に設けられた溝部2011aに回路基板51の前方側端部51dが圧入により嵌着され、これにより回路ユニット50が大径部771内部に固定されている。なお、溝部2011a内部に接着剤等を塗布した後、前方側端部51dを嵌入して回路ユニット50を大径部771内部に固定してもよい。 As shown in FIG. 25, the front end 51d of the circuit board 51 is press-fitted into the groove 2011a provided on the back surface of the mounting board 2011, whereby the circuit unit 50 is fixed inside the large-diameter part 771. ing. In addition, after applying adhesive etc. inside the groove part 2011a, the front side end part 51d may be fitted and the circuit unit 50 may be fixed inside the large diameter part 771.
 なお、本変形例に係るランプ2000の発光部2010は、実装基板2011の裏面に溝部2011aが形成されている点を除いては、変形例4に係るランプ700の発光部710と同様の構成を有する。実装基板2011、LED12、および封止体13により発光部2010が構成される。 The light emitting unit 2010 of the lamp 2000 according to this modification has the same configuration as the light emitting unit 710 of the lamp 700 according to modification 4 except that a groove 2011a is formed on the back surface of the mounting substrate 2011. Have. A light emitting unit 2010 is configured by the mounting substrate 2011, the LED 12, and the sealing body 13.
 また、さらには、ケースの底面に設けられた溝部に回路基板の後方側端部を嵌着し、実装基板裏面の溝部に回路基板の前方側端部を嵌着して、回路基板の前方側と後方側の両端部を溝部により固定してもよい。 Further, the rear side end of the circuit board is fitted into the groove provided on the bottom surface of the case, and the front side end of the circuit board is fitted into the groove on the back surface of the mounting board, so that the front side of the circuit board is fitted. Further, both end portions on the rear side may be fixed by groove portions.
 変形例4,変形例5,変形例20に係るランプ700,800,2000のように、実装基板がケースから独立している場合には、予め回路ユニットを収容されている状態の形状にしてから大径部内に収めたり、複数パーツに分かれた回路ユニットを大径部内で所定の形状に配置したりすることができるため、回路基板の素材や形状、および回路ユニットの形状や配置についてより自由度大きく設計することができるという利点がある。 When the mounting substrate is independent from the case as in the lamps 700, 800, and 2000 according to the fourth modification, the fifth modification, and the twenty modification 20, the circuit unit is stored in advance. Since it is possible to place the circuit unit in a large-diameter part or to arrange a circuit unit divided into multiple parts in a predetermined shape within the large-diameter part, the degree of freedom in circuit board material and shape, and circuit unit shape and arrangement There is an advantage that it can be designed large.
 <変形例21>
 例えば、図26に示す変形例21に係るランプ2100の回路ユニット2150のように、回路基板2151が閉じた円筒形状であってもよい。なお、図26は、ランプ2100の断面図であって、図2におけるA-A’矢視図に相当する断面図である。
<Modification 21>
For example, a cylindrical shape in which the circuit board 2151 is closed may be used like a circuit unit 2150 of the lamp 2100 according to the modified example 21 shown in FIG. FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view of the lamp 2100 and corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ in FIG.
 回路ユニット2150は、実施形態1における回路ユニット50のように細く丸めて小さくした状態で後方側開口75から大径部71内に挿入する必要がないので、回路基板2151に用いられる材料としては、ポリイミド等のフレキシブル基板に用いられるような可撓性を有する材料に限られず、絶縁性を有する材料であれば、樹脂やセラミック等の剛性を有する材料を用いてもよい。回路基板2151が可撓性を有する材料から成る場合、平板状の回路基板に配線パターンを形成して電子部品を実装した後に、回路基板を湾曲させて対向する2辺を、接着剤等を用いて接着し、円筒形状を形成してもよい。 Since the circuit unit 2150 does not need to be inserted into the large-diameter portion 71 from the rear side opening 75 in a state of being rounded and reduced like the circuit unit 50 in the first embodiment, as a material used for the circuit board 2151, The material is not limited to a flexible material used for a flexible substrate such as polyimide, and a material having rigidity such as a resin or ceramic may be used as long as it is an insulating material. In the case where the circuit board 2151 is made of a flexible material, a wiring pattern is formed on a flat circuit board and an electronic component is mounted, and then the two opposite sides are curved using an adhesive or the like. To form a cylindrical shape.
 なお、回路基板2151は、周面が閉じた筒状の形状をしているため、実施形態1における回路基板51とは異なり自身の弾性力により広がろうとする力が働かない。そのため、回路ユニット2150の大径部771内部における固定方法としては、大径部771の底面777に粘着テープを貼付して回路基板2151の後方側端部を固定したり、接着剤を用いて後方側端部を底面777に固定したりしてもよい。 Note that, since the circuit board 2151 has a cylindrical shape with a closed peripheral surface, unlike the circuit board 51 in the first embodiment, the force to spread by its own elastic force does not work. Therefore, as a fixing method inside the large-diameter portion 771 of the circuit unit 2150, an adhesive tape is applied to the bottom surface 777 of the large-diameter portion 771, and the rear side end portion of the circuit board 2151 is fixed, or an adhesive is used to The side end portion may be fixed to the bottom surface 777.
 また、図13に示す変形例5に係るランプ800のように、底面777に円形状の溝部を設けて、当該溝部に回路基板2151の後方側端部を嵌め込んで回路ユニット2150を大径部771内部に固定してもよい。 Further, like the lamp 800 according to the modified example 5 shown in FIG. 13, a circular groove portion is provided on the bottom surface 777, and the rear end portion of the circuit board 2151 is fitted into the groove portion so that the circuit unit 2150 has a large diameter portion. 771 may be fixed inside.
 さらには、変形例20に係るランプ2000(図25参照)と同様に、実装基板の裏面に溝部を設け、当該溝部に回路基板2151の前方側端部を嵌め込んで回路ユニット2150を大径部771内部に固定してもよい。 Further, like the lamp 2000 according to the modified example 20 (see FIG. 25), a groove is provided on the back surface of the mounting substrate, and the front end of the circuit board 2151 is fitted into the groove so that the circuit unit 2150 has a large diameter portion. 771 may be fixed inside.
 <変形例22>
 また、例えば、図27に示す変形例22に係るランプ2200の回路ユニット2250のように、複数の回路基板2251を有し、それぞれの回路基板2251が大径部771の内周面771aに沿って配置され、各回路基板2251の内周面2251bに電子部品52がそれぞれ実装される構成としてもよい。なお、図27は、ランプ2200の断面図であって、図2におけるA-A’矢視図に相当する断面図である。
<Modification 22>
Further, for example, like the circuit unit 2250 of the lamp 2200 according to the modified example 22 shown in FIG. 27, the circuit board 2251 has a plurality of circuit boards 2251 along the inner peripheral surface 771a of the large-diameter portion 771. It is good also as a structure which is arrange | positioned and the electronic component 52 is each mounted in the internal peripheral surface 2251b of each circuit board 2251. FIG. FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the lamp 2200 and corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ in FIG.
 回路ユニット2250においては、回路基板2251同士は配線2254で接続されている。別々の回路基板2251上に搭載されている電子部品52同士は配線2254を介して電気的に接続されており、これにより、各電子部品52が互いに連携して作動することができる。 In the circuit unit 2250, the circuit boards 2251 are connected to each other by wiring 2254. The electronic components 52 mounted on the separate circuit boards 2251 are electrically connected to each other through the wiring 2254, so that the electronic components 52 can operate in cooperation with each other.
 変形例22に係るランプ2200における大径部771内の回路ユニット2250の固定方法についても、粘着テープや接着剤、溝等を用いて固定してもよい。 As for the fixing method of the circuit unit 2250 in the large-diameter portion 771 in the lamp 2200 according to the modified example 22, it may be fixed using an adhesive tape, an adhesive, a groove or the like.
 また、それぞれの回路基板2251は、ランプ軸J1に沿って前方側から見た場合の形状が、図27に示すような円弧状に限られず、直線状や、1つもしくは複数個所において屈曲した形状であってもよい。複数個所において屈曲した形状の場合、全ての屈曲箇所において、外側(内周面771aに向う側)に突出する方向に屈曲するのが好ましい。 Further, each circuit board 2251 is not limited to the arc shape as shown in FIG. 27 as viewed from the front side along the lamp axis J1, but is linear or bent at one or more places. It may be. In the case of a shape bent at a plurality of locations, it is preferable to bend in a direction protruding outward (side toward the inner peripheral surface 771a) at all the bent locations.
 さらには、異なる形状の回路基板2251を複数組み合わせて用いてもよい。 Furthermore, a plurality of circuit boards 2251 having different shapes may be used in combination.
 <変形例23>
 さらには、図28に示す変形例23に係るランプ2300の回路ユニット2350のように、回路基板2351が丸く湾曲する代わりに屈曲して、前方側もしくは後方側から見た場合の端部の形状が多角形の1辺を欠いたような形状を有してもよい。なお、図28は、ランプ2300の断面図であって、図2におけるA-A’矢視図に相当する断面図である。
<Modification 23>
Further, like the circuit unit 2350 of the lamp 2300 according to the modified example 23 shown in FIG. 28, the circuit board 2351 is bent instead of curving, and the shape of the end portion when viewed from the front side or the rear side is You may have a shape which lacked one side of the polygon. FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view of the lamp 2300 and corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ in FIG.
 回路基板2351に用いられる部材としては、フレキシブル基板のような可撓性を有する部材でもよいし、絶縁性を有する部材であれば、樹脂やセラミック等の剛性を有する部材でもよい。剛性を有する部材を用いる場合、回路ユニット2350を大径部771内部に固定する方法については、粘着テープや接着剤、溝等を用いて固定してもよい。 The member used for the circuit board 2351 may be a flexible member such as a flexible substrate, or may be a rigid member such as a resin or ceramic as long as it is an insulating member. When using a member having rigidity, the circuit unit 2350 may be fixed inside the large-diameter portion 771 by using an adhesive tape, an adhesive, a groove, or the like.
 可撓性を有する部材を用いる場合、屈曲の程度にもよるが、通常は屈曲させても回路基板2351は自身の弾性力により広がろうとするため、実施形態1における回路ユニット50と同様に、回路基板2351の外周面2351aと大径部771の内周面771aとの間の摩擦力により、回路ユニット2350が大径部771内部に保持される。この場合においても、勿論、粘着テープや接着剤、溝等を用いて回路ユニット2350を固定してもよい。 When a member having flexibility is used, although it depends on the degree of bending, the circuit board 2351 usually tries to spread by its own elastic force even if it is bent. Therefore, like the circuit unit 50 in the first embodiment, The circuit unit 2350 is held inside the large-diameter portion 771 by the frictional force between the outer peripheral surface 2351a of the circuit board 2351 and the inner peripheral surface 771a of the large-diameter portion 771. Also in this case, of course, the circuit unit 2350 may be fixed using an adhesive tape, an adhesive, a groove or the like.
 実施形態2に係るランプ100においては、実装基板111に透明基板を用いた発光部110がグローブ40内に空中配置されており、LED12の後方側に発せられた光の一部が実装基板111を透過してグローブ40の後方側を照らすことにより、配光特性を向上させる構成を有していた。しかし、配光特性を向上させる構成はこれに限られず、以下のような変形例が考えられる。 In the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment, the light emitting unit 110 using a transparent substrate as the mounting substrate 111 is disposed in the air in the globe 40, and a part of the light emitted to the rear side of the LED 12 passes through the mounting substrate 111. The light transmission characteristics were improved by transmitting and illuminating the rear side of the globe 40. However, the configuration for improving the light distribution characteristics is not limited to this, and the following modifications may be considered.
 <変形例24>
 図29は、変形例24に係るランプ2400の要部の概略構成を示す一部切欠き斜視図である。図30は、変形例24に係るランプ2400の要部の概略構成を示す一部切欠き断面図である。図29および図30に示すように、ランプ2400においては、ケース2470の大径部2471の前面2478上に取着された支持具2420により発光部2410がグローブ40内に空中配置されるように支持されている。また、ランプ2400は、発光部2410から出射された光の一部を透過させ、一部を後方に反射する光学部材2490を備える。支持具2420は、例えばアルミ等から成るヒートシンクであり、発光部2410を支持するとともに発光部2410の放熱性を高める役割も果たす。
<Modification 24>
FIG. 29 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2400 according to Modification 24. FIG. FIG. 30 is a partially cutaway cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2400 according to Modification Example 24. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the lamp 2400 is supported so that the light emitting portion 2410 is disposed in the globe 40 by the support 2420 attached on the front surface 2478 of the large diameter portion 2471 of the case 2470. Has been. The lamp 2400 includes an optical member 2490 that transmits part of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 2410 and reflects part of the light backward. The support 2420 is a heat sink made of aluminum or the like, for example, and supports the light emitting unit 2410 and also improves the heat dissipation of the light emitting unit 2410.
 光学部材2490は、ビームスプリッタであり、両側が開口した略円筒形状の本体部2491と、本体部2491の後方側開口を塞ぐ略円環形状の取付部2492とを備える有底筒状である。本体部2491の前方側端部の外径(本体部2491の最大外径)は、LED12および封止体13を覆うのに十分な大きさである。光学部材2490はランプ軸J1を中心とする位置に位置決めされ、ネジ3により実装基板2411および支持具2420に固定されている。 The optical member 2490 is a beam splitter and has a bottomed cylindrical shape including a substantially cylindrical main body portion 2491 that is open on both sides and a substantially annular mounting portion 2492 that closes the rear-side opening of the main body portion 2491. The outer diameter of the front end portion of the main body portion 2491 (the maximum outer diameter of the main body portion 2491) is large enough to cover the LED 12 and the sealing body 13. The optical member 2490 is positioned at a position centered on the lamp axis J1, and is fixed to the mounting substrate 2411 and the support 2420 with screws 3.
 光学部材2490は透光性材料からなり、本体部2491の外周面2491aには鏡面処理が施されている。なお、透光性材料としては、例えば、ポリカーボネート等の樹脂材料、ガラス、セラミックなどが考えられる。また、外周面2491aに鏡面処理を施す方法としては、例えば金属薄膜や誘電体多層膜などの反射膜を、例えば熱蒸着法、電子ビーム蒸着法、スパッタ法、メッキ、などの方法により形成することが考えられる。 The optical member 2490 is made of a translucent material, and the outer peripheral surface 2491a of the main body portion 2491 is subjected to a mirror surface treatment. In addition, as a translucent material, resin materials, such as a polycarbonate, glass, a ceramic, etc. can be considered, for example. In addition, as a method of applying a mirror finish to the outer peripheral surface 2491a, for example, a reflective film such as a metal thin film or a dielectric multilayer film is formed by a method such as a thermal evaporation method, an electron beam evaporation method, a sputtering method, or a plating method. Can be considered.
 図30に示すように、LED12から出射され本体部2491の外周面2491aに入射した主出射光は、その一部が外周面2491aによって実装基板2411を避けた斜め後方へ反射され(光路L1)、他の一部は本体部2491を透過して前方に向かう(光路L3)。 As shown in FIG. 30, a part of the main emitted light emitted from the LED 12 and incident on the outer peripheral surface 2491a of the main body 2491 is reflected obliquely rearward from the mounting substrate 2411 by the outer peripheral surface 2491a (optical path L1). The other part passes through the main body 2491 and travels forward (optical path L3).
 ランプ2400は、LED12の主出射光の一部を、実装基板2411を避けた斜め後方へ指向させる本体部2491を備えているため、LED12の照射角が狭い場合でも配光特性が良好である。さらに、本体部2491は、主出射光の一部を反射させるだけでなく、他の一部を前方に向けて透過させるため、光学部材2490による影が生じ難く、点灯時にランプ2400を前方から見た場合の意匠性が良好である。 The lamp 2400 includes a main body 2491 that directs a part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 obliquely rearward away from the mounting substrate 2411. Therefore, the light distribution characteristic is good even when the irradiation angle of the LED 12 is narrow. Further, the main body 2491 not only reflects a part of the main emitted light but also transmits the other part forward, so that the shadow by the optical member 2490 hardly occurs, and the lamp 2400 can be viewed from the front when it is lit. The design properties are good.
 本変形例においては、光学部材2490の反射率(外周面2491aの反射率)が50%となり、光学部材2490の透過率(外周面2491aの透過率)が50%となるように、外周面2491aに鏡面加工が施されている。ランプ2400の配光特性を良好に保つためには、反射率は50%以上であることが好ましい。また、ランプ2400の点灯時の意匠性を良好に保つためには、透過率は40%以上であることが好ましい。まとめると、本体部2491による光の吸収が0%と仮定した場合、反射率は50%~60%が好ましく、透過率は40%~50%が好ましい。なお、反射率および透過率は、外周面2491aの全体に亘って均一である必要はなく、領域によってそれらが変化する構成でも良い。 In this modification, the outer peripheral surface 2491a is such that the reflectance of the optical member 2490 (the reflectance of the outer peripheral surface 2491a) is 50% and the transmittance of the optical member 2490 (the transmittance of the outer peripheral surface 2491a) is 50%. The mirror finish is applied. In order to keep the light distribution characteristics of the lamp 2400 good, the reflectance is preferably 50% or more. Further, in order to maintain a good design when the lamp 2400 is turned on, the transmittance is preferably 40% or more. In summary, assuming that light absorption by the main body 2491 is 0%, the reflectance is preferably 50% to 60%, and the transmittance is preferably 40% to 50%. Note that the reflectance and transmittance do not need to be uniform over the entire outer peripheral surface 2491a, and may be configured such that they vary depending on the region.
 なお、変形例24に係るランプ2400においては、ケース2470の前面2478が実装基板となっていない点以外は、基本的な構成はケース70と同じであり、大径部2471等を備える。前面2478には、貫通孔である配線用孔2414が形成されている。配線用孔2414は、ランプ1における配線用孔14に相当する。 The basic structure of the lamp 2400 according to the modified example 24 is the same as that of the case 70 except that the front surface 2478 of the case 2470 is not a mounting substrate, and includes a large diameter portion 2471 and the like. A wiring hole 2414 that is a through hole is formed in the front surface 2478. The wiring hole 2414 corresponds to the wiring hole 14 in the lamp 1.
 <変形例25>
 図31は、変形例25に係るランプ2500の要部の概略構成を示す一部切欠き斜視図である。図32は、変形例25に係るランプ2500の要部の概略構成を示す断面図である。図31および図32に示すように、変形例25に係るランプ2500は、光学部材2590が反射鏡であり、その本体部2591に開口部2594が設けられている点において、変形例24に係るランプ2400と相違する。その他の点については、基本的に変形例24に係るランプ2400と同様の構成を有する。
<Modification 25>
FIG. 31 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2500 according to Modification 25. FIG. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2500 according to Modification Example 25. As shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the lamp 2500 according to the modified example 25 is the lamp according to the modified example 24 in that the optical member 2590 is a reflecting mirror and an opening 2594 is provided in the main body 2591 thereof. Different from 2400. Other points are basically the same as those of the lamp 2400 according to the modified example 24.
 光学部材2590は、例えば、開口部2594が設けられている以外は変形例24に係る光学部材2490と同じ形状であって、本体部2591と取付部2592とを備える有底筒状である。本体部2591の前方側端部の外径(本体部2591の最大外径)はLED12および封止体13を覆うのに十分な大きさである。光学部材2590はランプ軸J1を中心とする位置に位置決めされ、ネジ3により実装基板2411および支持具2420に固定されている。支持具2420は、ヒートシンクであり、発光部2410を支持するとともに発光部2410の放熱性を高める役割も果たす。 The optical member 2590 has, for example, a bottomed cylindrical shape including the main body portion 2591 and the attachment portion 2592, which is the same shape as the optical member 2490 according to the modified example 24 except that the opening 2594 is provided. The outer diameter of the front end portion of the main body portion 2591 (the maximum outer diameter of the main body portion 2591) is large enough to cover the LED 12 and the sealing body 13. The optical member 2590 is positioned at a position centering on the lamp axis J1, and is fixed to the mounting substrate 2411 and the support 2420 with the screw 3. The support 2420 is a heat sink and supports the light emitting unit 2410 and also serves to enhance the heat dissipation of the light emitting unit 2410.
 本体部2591には、本体部2591の周方向に沿って長尺となった開口部2594が複数設けられている。具体的には、各開口部2594は、本体部2591の筒軸を中心とする円環を4等分した略円弧状のスリットであって、4つの略円弧状のスリットで構成される途切れ目のある略円環状のスリットが、筒軸を中心として同心円状に2重に設けられている。開口部2594が本体部2591の周方向に沿って設けられているため、開口部2594と封止体13との周方向の位置決めが容易である。 The main body 2591 is provided with a plurality of openings 2594 that are elongated along the circumferential direction of the main body 2591. Specifically, each opening 2594 is a substantially arc-shaped slit that is obtained by dividing an annular ring around the cylinder axis of the main body 2591 into four equal parts, and is formed by four substantially arc-shaped slits. A substantially annular slit with a concentric circle about the cylinder axis is provided. Since the opening 2594 is provided along the circumferential direction of the main body 2591, positioning of the opening 2594 and the sealing body 13 in the circumferential direction is easy.
 発光部2410の封止体13は、前方側からランプ軸J1に沿って後方側を見た場合において、各開口部2594から部分的に露出している。したがって、図32に示すように、LED12からの主出射光の一部は、外周面2591aで反射されて実装基板2411を避けた斜め後方へ向かうが(光路L4)、LED12からの主出射光の他の一部は、開口部2594を通過して前方へ漏れる(光路L5)。 The sealing body 13 of the light emitting unit 2410 is partially exposed from each opening 2594 when viewed from the front side along the lamp axis J1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32, a part of the main emitted light from the LED 12 is reflected by the outer peripheral surface 2591a and heads obliquely backward avoiding the mounting substrate 2411 (optical path L4), but the main emitted light from the LED 12 The other part passes through the opening 2594 and leaks forward (optical path L5).
 ランプ2500は、LED12の主出射光の一部を、実装基板2411を避けた斜め後方へ指向させる光学部材2590を備えているため、LED12の照射角が狭い場合でも配光特性が良好である。さらに、光学部材2590には、主出射光の他の一部を前方へ漏らす開口部2594が設けられているため、光学部材2590による影が生じ難く、点灯時にランプ2500を前方から見た場合の意匠性が良好である。 The lamp 2500 includes an optical member 2590 that directs a part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 obliquely backward avoiding the mounting substrate 2411. Therefore, the light distribution characteristic is good even when the irradiation angle of the LED 12 is narrow. Further, since the optical member 2590 is provided with an opening 2594 that leaks the other part of the main emitted light forward, the optical member 2590 is less likely to be shaded by the optical member 2590, and when the lamp 2500 is viewed from the front during lighting. Good designability.
 なお、開口部2594の形状、寸法、数、配置は、必ずしも上記に限定されず任意である。なお、開口部2594は、本変形例のようなスリットに限定されず、穴や切り欠きなどLED12の主出射光の他の一部を前方へ漏らすことができるものであれば良い。また、本変形例では、開口部2594は貫通孔であって何も嵌め込まれていないが、開口部2594はこのような構成でなくとも光が前方へ漏れる構成であればよく、例えば、開口部2594の全部または一部に透光性の部材が嵌め込まれており、当該透光性の部材を透過して光が前方へ漏れる構成でもよい。 In addition, the shape, size, number, and arrangement of the opening 2594 are not necessarily limited to the above, and are arbitrary. Note that the opening 2594 is not limited to the slit as in the present modification, and any opening that can leak the other part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 forward, such as a hole or a notch, may be used. Further, in this modification, the opening 2594 is a through-hole and nothing is fitted therein. However, the opening 2594 may have a configuration in which light leaks forward without being configured in this way. A translucent member may be fitted into all or a part of 2594, and light may leak forward through the translucent member.
 <変形例26>
 図33は、変形例26に係るランプ2600の要部の概略構成を示す一部切欠き断面図である。図33に示すように、ランプ2600においては発光部2610の実装基板2611が透明基板である点、発光部2610を前面2478に対して支持する支持具2620が導光部材である点、および光学部材を備えていない点において、変形例24に係るランプ2400および変形例25に係るランプ2500と相違する。
<Modification 26>
FIG. 33 is a partially cutaway cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2600 according to Modification 26. As shown in FIG. 33, in the lamp 2600, the mounting substrate 2611 of the light emitting unit 2610 is a transparent substrate, the support 2620 that supports the light emitting unit 2610 with respect to the front surface 2478 is a light guide member, and the optical member. Is different from the lamp 2400 according to Modification Example 24 and the lamp 2500 according to Modification Example 25.
 支持具2620は、アクリル等の樹脂やガラス等の透光性の部材から成り、例えば、実装基板2611が取着されている前方側端面の径が実装基板2611の径と略等しく、前方から後方へ向けて縮径した略円柱形状(逆円錐台形状)を有する。 The support 2620 is made of a light-transmitting member such as a resin such as acrylic or glass. For example, the diameter of the front end surface to which the mounting board 2611 is attached is substantially equal to the diameter of the mounting board 2611, and the front to the rear. It has a substantially cylindrical shape (inverted truncated cone shape) that has a diameter reduced toward.
 発光部2610のLED12から後方側に発せられた光は、透明基板である実装基板2611を透過して導光部材である支持具2620に入射し、支持具2620の側面(周面)から外部へと出射してグローブ40の後方側を照らす。これにより、LED12の照射角が狭い場合でも良好な配光特性を得ることができる。 Light emitted from the LED 12 of the light emitting unit 2610 to the rear side passes through the mounting substrate 2611 that is a transparent substrate and enters the support 2626 that is a light guide member, and from the side surface (circumferential surface) of the support 2620 to the outside. And the rear side of the globe 40 is illuminated. Thereby, a favorable light distribution characteristic can be obtained even when the irradiation angle of the LED 12 is narrow.
 なお、支持具2620の形状は、上記のような前方から後方へ向けて縮径した略円柱形状に限られない。例えば、前方から後方まで径の大きさが変わらない円柱形状であってもよいし、円柱に限られず、五角柱や六角柱等の多角柱であってもよい。さらには、支持具2620内部に、例えばドーム形の空間が設けられていても良く、LED12から後方側に発せられて支持具2620に入射した光をグローブ40の後方側へと出射させることができるものであれば、任意の形状としてよい。 Note that the shape of the support 2620 is not limited to the substantially cylindrical shape having a diameter reduced from the front to the rear as described above. For example, a cylindrical shape whose diameter does not change from the front to the rear may be used, and the shape is not limited to a cylindrical shape, and may be a polygonal column such as a pentagonal column or a hexagonal column. Furthermore, for example, a dome-shaped space may be provided inside the support 2620, and the light emitted from the LED 12 to the rear side and incident on the support tool 2620 can be emitted to the rear side of the globe 40. Any shape can be used.
 <変形例27>
 また、導光部材から成る支持具がヒートシンクを備える構成としてもよい。図34は、変形例27に係るランプ2700の要部の概略構成を示す一部切欠き断面図である。変形例27に係るランプ2700においては、支持具2720がその内部にヒートシンク2721を有している点において、変形例26に係るランプ2600と相違している。
<Modification 27>
Moreover, it is good also as a structure with which the support tool which consists of a light guide member is equipped with a heat sink. FIG. 34 is a partially cutaway cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2700 according to Modification 27. The lamp 2700 according to the modification 27 is different from the lamp 2600 according to the modification 26 in that the support 2720 has a heat sink 2721 therein.
 導光部材から成る支持具2720は、中央部に円柱状の貫通孔を有し、当該貫通孔内に円柱状のヒートシンク2721が挿設されている。 The support 2720 made of a light guide member has a cylindrical through hole at the center, and a cylindrical heat sink 2721 is inserted into the through hole.
 ヒートシンク2721は、例えばアルミ等の金属から成り、その前面は透明基板である実装基板2611の後方側主面である裏面に取着されている。 The heat sink 2721 is made of, for example, a metal such as aluminum, and the front surface thereof is attached to the back surface, which is the rear main surface of the mounting substrate 2611 that is a transparent substrate.
 発光部2610のLED12から後方側に発せられた光は、透明基板である実装基板2611を透過して導光部材である支持具2720に入射し、支持具2720の側面(周面)から外部へと出射してグローブ40の後方側を照らす。これにより、LED12の照射角が狭い場合でも良好な配光特性を得ることができる。 Light emitted from the LED 12 of the light emitting unit 2610 to the rear side is transmitted through the mounting substrate 2611 that is a transparent substrate and enters the support 2720 that is a light guide member, and from the side surface (circumferential surface) of the support 2720 to the outside. And the rear side of the globe 40 is illuminated. Thereby, a favorable light distribution characteristic can be obtained even when the irradiation angle of the LED 12 is narrow.
 また、ヒートシンク2721により、発光部2610の放熱性を高めることができる。 Further, the heat dissipation of the light emitting portion 2610 can be enhanced by the heat sink 2721.
 ヒートシンク2721の形状は、上記のような円柱形状に限られず、例えば、多角柱でもよい。 The shape of the heat sink 2721 is not limited to the cylindrical shape as described above, and may be, for example, a polygonal column.
 さらには、ヒートシンク2721を円盤の中央部に円柱が突設された形状とし、支持具2720の貫通孔に当該円柱が挿嵌される構成としてもよい。この場合、ヒートシンクの円盤部分が、前面2478上(前方側)に取着されてもよい。 Furthermore, the heat sink 2721 may have a shape in which a cylinder protrudes from the center of the disk, and the cylinder may be inserted into the through hole of the support 2720. In this case, the disk portion of the heat sink may be attached on the front surface 2478 (front side).
 またさらには、前面2478の中央部に貫通孔を設けて、上記ヒートシンクの円柱部分を前面2478の裏面側(後方側)から当該貫通孔内に挿通し、前面2478の貫通孔から飛び出した円柱に支持具2720を嵌め込んでもよい。この場合、ヒートシンクの円盤部分は、前面2478の裏面に接着剤等を用いて固定してもよいし、例えば、係合爪等の別の部材を設けて円盤部分を前面2478もしくは大径部2471の周面に固定してもよい。 Still further, a through hole is provided in the center of the front surface 2478 so that the cylindrical portion of the heat sink is inserted into the through hole from the back surface side (rear side) of the front surface 2478 and protrudes from the through hole of the front surface 2478. A support 2720 may be fitted. In this case, the disk portion of the heat sink may be fixed to the back surface of the front surface 2478 using an adhesive or the like. For example, another member such as an engaging claw may be provided to connect the disk portion to the front surface 2478 or the large diameter portion 2471. You may fix to the surrounding surface.
 <変形例28>
 LEDの主出射光の一部を前方に透過させ、残りの一部を斜め後方へ反射させる光学部材としては、次のような変形例も考えられる。
<Modification 28>
As an optical member that transmits a part of the main emitted light of the LED forward and reflects the remaining part obliquely rearward, the following modifications can be considered.
 図35は、変形例28に係るランプ2800の要部の概略構成を示す一部切欠き斜視図である。図36は、ランプ2800の要部の概略構成を示す一部切欠き断面図である。図37は、グローブ40を取り外した状態のランプ2800を前方側から見た平面図である。 FIG. 35 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a main part of a lamp 2800 according to Modification 28. FIG. FIG. 36 is a partially cutaway cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a main part of the lamp 2800. FIG. 37 is a plan view of the lamp 2800 with the globe 40 removed, as viewed from the front side.
 光学部材2890は、実装基板11の中央に立設された支柱2895と、支柱2895の前方側端部に取着された星状部材2891とから成る。星状部材2891は、ガラスやアクリル等の透光性の部材から成り、図37に示すように、平面視した場合に、8つの長方形の羽根が中心から互いにほぼ等間隔空けて放射状に延出した星状もしくはアスタリスク状の形状を有する。発光部10の封止体13は、前方側からランプ軸J1に沿って後方側を見た場合において、各羽根の間の隙間2894から部分的に露出している。また、星状部材2891の表面(前方側主面)および/または裏面(後方側主面)にはフロスト加工が施されている。これにより、図36に示すように、LED12の主出射光の一部は隙間2894を通過して前方へと向かい(光路L6)、残りの一部は星状部材2891により拡散および反射されて、その一部は実装基板11を避けた斜め後方へと反射される(光路L7)。 The optical member 2890 includes a support column 2895 erected at the center of the mounting substrate 11 and a star-shaped member 2891 attached to the front end of the support column 2895. The star-shaped member 2891 is made of a light-transmitting member such as glass or acrylic, and when viewed in plan, as shown in FIG. 37, eight rectangular blades extend radially from the center at substantially equal intervals. It has the shape of a star or asterisk. The sealing body 13 of the light emitting unit 10 is partially exposed from the gap 2894 between the blades when viewed from the front side along the lamp axis J1. Further, the front surface (front side main surface) and / or the back surface (rear side main surface) of the star-shaped member 2891 is frosted. Thus, as shown in FIG. 36, a part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 passes forward through the gap 2894 (optical path L6), and the remaining part is diffused and reflected by the star-shaped member 2891. A part of the light is reflected obliquely backward avoiding the mounting substrate 11 (optical path L7).
 なお、図36においては、星状部材2891の羽根が重なる中心部分は断面が表示されているが、その外側は羽根が重なっておらず隙間2894となっている。 In FIG. 36, a cross-section is displayed at the central portion where the wings of the star-shaped member 2891 overlap, but the wings do not overlap and a gap 2894 is formed outside.
 以上説明したように、変形例28に係るランプ2800は、LED12の主出射光の一部を、実装基板11を避けた斜め後方へ拡散反射させる光学部材2890を備えているため、LED12の照射角が狭い場合でも配光特性が良好である。さらに、光学部材2890には、主出射光の他の一部を前方へ通過させる隙間2894が設けられているため、光学部材2890による影が生じ難く、点灯時にランプ2800を前方から見た場合の意匠性が良好である。 As described above, the lamp 2800 according to the modified example 28 includes the optical member 2890 that diffuses and reflects a part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 obliquely rearward away from the mounting substrate 11. The light distribution characteristics are good even when N is narrow. Further, since the optical member 2890 is provided with a gap 2894 that allows other part of the main emitted light to pass forward, shadows due to the optical member 2890 hardly occur, and when the lamp 2800 is viewed from the front during lighting. Good designability.
 なお、星状部材2891の羽根の形状や数、隙間の形状は、必ずしも上記に限定されず任意である。また、星状部材2891と支柱2895とを一体的に形成してもよい。さらには、星状部材2891の羽根を、その断面が図30に示す光学部材2490の断面のように湾曲した形状としてもよい。また、フロスト加工に代えて星状部材2891の羽根の裏面に鏡面処理を施し、光学部材2490と同様にLED12の主出射光の一部を前方側に透過させ、残りの一部を、実装基板11を避けた斜め後方へと反射させるようにしてもよい。 In addition, the shape and number of the blades of the star-shaped member 2891 and the shape of the gap are not necessarily limited to the above, and are arbitrary. Further, the star-shaped member 2891 and the support column 2895 may be integrally formed. Furthermore, the blades of the star-shaped member 2891 may have a shape whose cross section is curved like the cross section of the optical member 2490 shown in FIG. Further, in place of the frost processing, the back surface of the blades of the star-shaped member 2891 is mirror-finished, and like the optical member 2490, a part of the main emitted light of the LED 12 is transmitted to the front side, and the remaining part is mounted on the mounting substrate. You may make it reflect in the diagonally backward which avoided 11.
 またさらには、星状部材2891が羽根や隙間を備えず、ガラス等の透光性の部材から成る円盤の表面に、星状(アスタリスク状)にフロスト加工を施してもよい。 Furthermore, the star-shaped member 2891 may be provided with a frosting process in a star shape (asterisk shape) on the surface of a disk made of a light-transmitting member such as glass without providing a blade or a gap.
 またさらには、フロスト加工に代えて、LED12からの出射光を、実装基板11を避けた斜め後方へと反射させる角度の傾斜面を星状部材2891の裏面に形成し、当該傾斜面に鏡面加工を施してもよい。この場合、傾斜面は、各羽根に対して1つずつ羽根のほぼ全面にわたって形成されても良いし、各羽根に微細な傾斜面が多数形成されてもよい。後者の場合、それぞれの羽根に形成される傾斜面の角度や傾斜の方向を揃えても良いが、異なる角度や傾斜方向の傾斜面を組み合わせることにより、光の拡散性が向上し、点灯時にランプ2800のグローブ40後方側において明るさにむらが出来にくくなるため、より良好な意匠性を実現することができる。 Still further, instead of frost processing, an inclined surface having an angle for reflecting the emitted light from the LED 12 to an oblique rear side avoiding the mounting substrate 11 is formed on the back surface of the star-shaped member 2891, and the inclined surface is mirror-finished. May be applied. In this case, the inclined surface may be formed over almost the entire surface of the blade, one for each blade, or a large number of fine inclined surfaces may be formed on each blade. In the latter case, the angle of the inclined surface and the direction of inclination formed on each blade may be aligned, but by combining the inclined surfaces with different angles and inclination directions, the light diffusibility is improved and the lamp is turned on at the time of lighting. Since unevenness in brightness is less likely to occur on the back side of the globe 40 of 2800, better design properties can be realized.
 <変形例29>
 上記各実施形態および各変形例においては、ケースは樹脂から形成されていたが、これに限られない。ケースを形成する材料としては、樹脂の他に、金属やセラミックを用いてもよい。ケースを金属から形成する場合、ケース内周面(大径部内周面)に絶縁フィルムコーティングを施してもよい。
<Modification 29>
In each said embodiment and each modification, although the case was formed from resin, it is not restricted to this. As a material for forming the case, a metal or ceramic may be used in addition to the resin. When the case is formed of metal, an insulating film coating may be applied to the inner peripheral surface of the case (larger diameter inner peripheral surface).
 <変形例30>
 実施形態4、変形例11、変形例12では、第1ケース部と第2ケース部の側壁部分の出射方向側の部分が切り欠かれていたが、これに限られない。第1ケース部と第2ケース部の側壁部分が切り欠かれておらず、第1ケース部および第2ケース部の発光部側端部の形状が、側面視において筒軸に略直交する直線であってもよい。
<Modification 30>
In Embodiment 4, Modification Example 11, and Modification Example 12, the side portions of the first case portion and the second case portion on the emission direction side are notched, but the present invention is not limited to this. The side wall portions of the first case portion and the second case portion are not cut out, and the shape of the light emitting portion side end portions of the first case portion and the second case portion is a straight line that is substantially orthogonal to the cylinder axis in a side view. There may be.
 <変形例31>
 上記変形例13~18においては、基台部は四角錐台であったが、これに限られない。基台部がその他の多角錐台であってもよいし、円錐台であってもよい。さらには、基台部が、正方体や直方体、多面体形状であってもよい。
<Modification 31>
In the modified examples 13 to 18, the base part is a quadrangular pyramid, but the invention is not limited to this. The base part may be another polygonal frustum or a truncated cone. Furthermore, the base part may be a rectangular parallelepiped, a rectangular parallelepiped, or a polyhedron.
 <変形例32>
 上記各実施形態および各変形例においては、半導体発光素子としてはLEDを用いた場合を例に説明したが、半導体発光素子はLEDに限られない。半導体発光素子として、例えば、LD(レーザダイオード)であっても良く、EL素子(エレクトリックルミネッセンス素子)であっても良い。
<Modification 32>
In each of the above embodiments and modifications, the case where an LED is used as the semiconductor light emitting element has been described as an example, but the semiconductor light emitting element is not limited to the LED. The semiconductor light emitting element may be, for example, an LD (laser diode) or an EL element (electric luminescence element).
 <変形例33>
 回路基板とケースとの間に熱伝導性部材を配して、回路ユニットで発生した熱をより積極的にケースへと伝導させ、ケースから口金を介して外部へと放熱する構成としてもよい。ここでは、図12に示す変形例4に係るランプ700の構成に熱伝導性部材を適用した場合を例に、図面を用いて以下に説明する。
<Modification 33>
A heat conductive member may be arranged between the circuit board and the case, and the heat generated in the circuit unit may be more actively conducted to the case and radiated from the case to the outside through the base. Here, the case where a heat conductive member is applied to the structure of the lamp 700 according to the modification 4 shown in FIG. 12 will be described below with reference to the drawings.
 図38は、変形例33に係るランプ2900の概略構成を示す断面図である。同図に示すように、ランプ2900においては、回路基板51の外周面51aと、ケース770の大径部771の内周面771aとの間に、熱伝導性部材2960が配設されている。ランプ2900は、熱伝導性部材2960が配設されている点を除いては、変形例4に係るランプ700と基本的な構成は同じである。 38 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 2900 according to Modification 33. FIG. As shown in the drawing, in the lamp 2900, a heat conductive member 2960 is disposed between the outer peripheral surface 51 a of the circuit board 51 and the inner peripheral surface 771 a of the large diameter portion 771 of the case 770. The basic structure of the lamp 2900 is the same as that of the lamp 700 according to the modification 4 except that the heat conductive member 2960 is provided.
 熱伝導性部材2960としては、例えば、熱伝導性樹脂を用いることができる。この場合、ペースト状の熱伝導性樹脂を内周面771aに塗布した後、回路ユニット50を大径部771内部に挿入する。そして、回路基板51が自身の弾性力で広がることにより回路基板51の外周面51aが熱伝導性樹脂と密着する。この状態で熱伝導性樹脂が固化して熱伝導性部材2960となる。熱伝導性部材2960は、回路ユニット50で発生した熱をケース770へと伝導する役割に加えて、回路基板51を大径部771に固定する接着剤の役割も果たす。即ち、回路ユニット50の放熱性向上効果に加え、回路基板51の形状を保持して回路ユニット50を安定的に保持する効果も得ることができる。これにより、各種電子部品52が受ける熱負荷および、振動等による物理的なダメージを軽減し、長寿命化に資することができる。 As the heat conductive member 2960, for example, a heat conductive resin can be used. In this case, after applying paste-like thermally conductive resin to the inner peripheral surface 771a, the circuit unit 50 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 771. The circuit board 51 spreads by its own elastic force, so that the outer peripheral surface 51a of the circuit board 51 is in close contact with the thermally conductive resin. In this state, the heat conductive resin is solidified to form a heat conductive member 2960. The thermally conductive member 2960 plays a role of an adhesive that fixes the circuit board 51 to the large diameter portion 771 in addition to the role of conducting the heat generated in the circuit unit 50 to the case 770. That is, in addition to the effect of improving the heat dissipation of the circuit unit 50, the effect of stably holding the circuit unit 50 by holding the shape of the circuit board 51 can be obtained. As a result, the thermal load received by the various electronic components 52 and physical damage due to vibration or the like can be reduced, which contributes to a longer life.
 また、上記のように、ペースト状の熱伝導性樹脂を固化させる場合の他に、熱伝導性部材として、熱伝導性の材料から成るシートの両面に熱伝導性を有する粘着剤が塗布された粘着シートを用いてもよい。この場合、シートを形成する熱伝導性の材料としては、熱伝導性樹脂や、金属、セラミック等を用いることができる。 Further, as described above, in addition to the case where the paste-like heat conductive resin is solidified, as a heat conductive member, a heat conductive adhesive was applied to both surfaces of a sheet made of a heat conductive material. An adhesive sheet may be used. In this case, as the heat conductive material forming the sheet, a heat conductive resin, metal, ceramic, or the like can be used.
 図38に示す本変形例に係るランプ2900では、実装基板711はケース770とは独立した別部材である。従って、実装基板711がケース770から取り外された状態で、大径部771の内周面771aに熱伝導性樹脂を容易に塗布することができる。例えば、図2に示す実施形態1に係るランプ1のように、実装基板とケースとが一体的に形成されている構成において熱伝導性樹脂を塗布する場合には、ケース70の後方側開口75から樹脂を塗布するためのノズル等を大径部71の内部に挿入して、熱伝導性樹脂を塗布する方法が考えられる。 38. In the lamp 2900 according to this modification shown in FIG. 38, the mounting substrate 711 is a separate member independent of the case 770. Therefore, the heat conductive resin can be easily applied to the inner peripheral surface 771a of the large diameter portion 771 in a state where the mounting substrate 711 is removed from the case 770. For example, when the thermally conductive resin is applied in a configuration in which the mounting substrate and the case are integrally formed as in the lamp 1 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. A method of applying a heat conductive resin by inserting a nozzle or the like for applying a resin into the large-diameter portion 71 can be considered.
 <変形例34>
 変形例33に係るランプ2900においては、回路基板51の外周面51aの略全面が接するように熱伝導性部材2960が配されていたが、これに限られない。図39に、変形例34に係るランプ3000の断面図を示す。同図に示すように、ランプ3000においては、回路基板51の外周面51aのうち、電子部品52が実装されている箇所に対応する部分(電子部品52が実装されている箇所の裏面側の部分)にのみ熱伝導性部材3060が配設されている。ランプ3000は、熱伝導性部材3060が配設されている点を除いては、変形例4に係るランプ700と基本的な構成は同じである。
<Modification 34>
In the lamp 2900 according to the modification 33, the heat conductive member 2960 is disposed so that the substantially entire outer peripheral surface 51a of the circuit board 51 is in contact with the lamp 2900. However, the present invention is not limited to this. FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional view of a lamp 3000 according to the modified example 34. As shown in the figure, in the lamp 3000, a portion of the outer peripheral surface 51a of the circuit board 51 corresponding to a location where the electronic component 52 is mounted (a portion on the back side of the location where the electronic component 52 is mounted). Only) is provided with a heat conductive member 3060. The basic structure of the lamp 3000 is the same as that of the lamp 700 according to the modification 4 except that the heat conductive member 3060 is provided.
 本変形例の構成によっても、電子部品52で発生した熱を熱伝導性部材3060を介してケース770へと伝導させることができるため、回路ユニット50の放熱性を向上させることができる。加えて、熱伝導性部材3060に熱伝導性樹脂を用いた場合、変形例33の熱伝導性部材2960と同様に熱伝導性部材3060が接着剤としての機能も果たすため、回路基板51の形状を保持して回路ユニット50を安定的に保持することができる。これにより、各種電子部品が受ける熱負荷および、振動等による物理的なダメージを軽減し、長寿命化に資することができる。また、変形例33に係るランプ2900と比較して、熱伝導性部材の使用量が少ないため、省資源化および軽量化に資することができる。 Also with the configuration of the present modification, the heat generated in the electronic component 52 can be conducted to the case 770 via the heat conductive member 3060, so that the heat dissipation of the circuit unit 50 can be improved. In addition, when a heat conductive resin is used for the heat conductive member 3060, the heat conductive member 3060 also functions as an adhesive in the same manner as the heat conductive member 2960 of the modified example 33. And the circuit unit 50 can be stably held. As a result, thermal damage received by various electronic components and physical damage due to vibration or the like can be reduced, which contributes to a longer life. Moreover, since the usage-amount of a heat conductive member is few compared with the lamp | ramp 2900 which concerns on the modification 33, it can contribute to resource saving and weight reduction.
 本変形例に係るランプ3000においても、実装基板711はケース770とは独立した別部材である。従って、回路基板51の外周面51aの、電子部品が実装されている箇所に対応する部分に熱伝導性樹脂が塗布された状態の回路ユニット50を、実装基板711が取り外された状態のケース770の大径部771内に容易に挿入することができる。そして、回路基板51が自身の弾性力により広がると熱伝導性樹脂が大径部771の内周面771aに押し付けられ、そのまま固化して熱伝導性部材3060となる。 Also in the lamp 3000 according to this modification, the mounting substrate 711 is a separate member independent of the case 770. Therefore, the case 770 in which the mounting substrate 711 is removed from the circuit unit 50 in a state where the heat conductive resin is applied to the portion corresponding to the portion where the electronic component is mounted on the outer peripheral surface 51a of the circuit board 51. Can be easily inserted into the large-diameter portion 771. When the circuit board 51 spreads by its own elastic force, the heat conductive resin is pressed against the inner peripheral surface 771a of the large diameter portion 771 and solidifies as it is to become the heat conductive member 3060.
 また、本変形例においても変形例33と同様に、熱伝導性部材3060として熱伝導性の材料から成るシートの両面に熱伝導性を有する粘着剤が塗布された粘着シートを用いてもよい。この場合、シートを形成する熱伝導性の材料としては、熱伝導性樹脂や、金属、セラミック等を用いることができる。 Also in the present modified example, as in the modified example 33, as the thermally conductive member 3060, an adhesive sheet in which an adhesive having thermal conductivity is applied to both surfaces of a sheet made of a thermally conductive material may be used. In this case, as the heat conductive material forming the sheet, a heat conductive resin, metal, ceramic, or the like can be used.
 <変形例35>
 変形例33および変形例34においては、回路基板の外周面と大径部の内周面との間に熱伝導性部材を配設して回路ユニットの放熱性を向上させる構成について説明した。しかし、回路ユニットの放熱性を向上させる構成は、これに限られない。例えば、回路基板とヒートパイプとを熱伝導性部材を用いて熱的に結合してもよい。ここでは、ヒートパイプを有する実施形態2に係るランプ100の構成に熱伝導性部材を適用した場合を例に、図面を用いて以下に説明する。
<Modification 35>
In the modification 33 and the modification 34, the configuration has been described in which a heat conductive member is disposed between the outer peripheral surface of the circuit board and the inner peripheral surface of the large-diameter portion to improve the heat dissipation of the circuit unit. However, the structure which improves the heat dissipation of a circuit unit is not restricted to this. For example, the circuit board and the heat pipe may be thermally coupled using a heat conductive member. Here, the case where a heat conductive member is applied to the configuration of the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment having a heat pipe will be described below with reference to the drawings.
 図40は、変形例35に係るランプ3100の概略構成を示す断面図である。同図に示すように、ランプ3100においては、ケース170の小径部172内部および、底面177を超えて大径部171の後方側端部にまで熱伝導性部材3160が充填されている。ランプ3100は、熱伝導性部材3160を有する点を除いては、基本的な構成は、実施形態2に係るランプ100と同じである。 FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 3100 according to Modification 35. As shown in the figure, in the lamp 3100, the heat conductive member 3160 is filled up to the inside of the small diameter portion 172 of the case 170 and the rear side end portion of the large diameter portion 171 beyond the bottom surface 177. The basic configuration of the lamp 3100 is the same as that of the lamp 100 according to the second embodiment except that the lamp 3100 includes a heat conductive member 3160.
 図40に示すように、熱伝導性部材3160は、回路基板51の後方側端部51cにまで達しており、ヒートパイプ20の後方側の部分であるボトム部20aは、熱伝導性部材3160内に埋没している。従って、回路基板51の後方側端部51cとヒートパイプ20のボトム部20aとは熱伝導性部材3160により熱的に接続されている。これにより、電子部品52で発生した熱が回路基板51の後方側端部51cから熱伝導性部材3160を介してヒートパイプ20へと伝わり、ヒートパイプ20から支持台座部21および受電部80を介して外部へと放熱される。 As shown in FIG. 40, the heat conductive member 3160 reaches the rear side end portion 51 c of the circuit board 51, and the bottom portion 20 a that is the rear side portion of the heat pipe 20 is in the heat conductive member 3160. Buried in Accordingly, the rear side end portion 51 c of the circuit board 51 and the bottom portion 20 a of the heat pipe 20 are thermally connected by the heat conductive member 3160. Thereby, the heat generated in the electronic component 52 is transmitted from the rear side end portion 51c of the circuit board 51 to the heat pipe 20 via the heat conductive member 3160, and from the heat pipe 20 via the support base portion 21 and the power receiving portion 80. To dissipate heat to the outside.
 また、本変形例の構成によると、電子部品52で発生した熱が回路基板51の後方側端部51cから小径部172へと伝わる際に、底面177を介して伝わる経路に加えて、熱伝導性部材3160を介して小径部172へと伝わることができる。これにより、回路基板51から小径部172へとより熱が伝わりやすく、回路ユニット50の放熱性をより向上させることができる。 Further, according to the configuration of this modification, when heat generated in the electronic component 52 is transmitted from the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51 to the small diameter portion 172, in addition to the path transmitted through the bottom surface 177, the heat conduction It can be transmitted to the small diameter portion 172 through the sex member 3160. Thereby, heat is more easily transmitted from the circuit board 51 to the small diameter portion 172, and the heat dissipation of the circuit unit 50 can be further improved.
 熱伝導性部材3160としては、熱伝導性樹脂を用いることができる。この場合、支持台座部21と熱伝導性部材3160とを、同一の材料を用いて一体的に形成してもよい。その場合、例えば、次のような方法が考えられる。後方側開口175から大径部171内部に回路ユニット50を挿入した後、小径部172に受電部80を嵌着する。そして、開口179から樹脂を充填するためのノズル等を挿入して、絶縁部82およびアイレット部83により形作られる凹部内および小径部172内部に、熱伝導性樹脂を充填する。その後、ヒートパイプ20の後方側端部20bが絶縁部82に達するまでヒートパイプ20を開口179からケース170内に挿入し、その状態で熱伝導性樹脂を固化させる。これにより、支持台座部21と熱伝導性部材3160とが、同一の熱伝導性樹脂材料から一体的に形成される。 As the heat conductive member 3160, a heat conductive resin can be used. In this case, you may form the support base part 21 and the heat conductive member 3160 integrally using the same material. In this case, for example, the following method can be considered. After the circuit unit 50 is inserted into the large diameter portion 171 from the rear opening 175, the power receiving unit 80 is fitted to the small diameter portion 172. Then, a nozzle or the like for filling the resin from the opening 179 is inserted, and the heat conductive resin is filled in the concave portion and the small diameter portion 172 formed by the insulating portion 82 and the eyelet portion 83. Thereafter, the heat pipe 20 is inserted into the case 170 from the opening 179 until the rear end 20b of the heat pipe 20 reaches the insulating portion 82, and the heat conductive resin is solidified in that state. Thereby, the support base part 21 and the heat conductive member 3160 are integrally formed from the same heat conductive resin material.
 熱伝導性樹脂を充填する際には、底面177に若干達しない程度の量の熱伝導性樹脂を充填するとよい。そうすると、ヒートパイプ20が挿入された時に、熱伝導性樹脂が押し上げられ、底面177を超えて大径部171にまで入り込み、回路基板51の後方側端部51cに達することができる。 When filling the heat conductive resin, it is preferable to fill the heat conductive resin in an amount that does not reach the bottom surface 177 slightly. Then, when the heat pipe 20 is inserted, the heat conductive resin is pushed up, enters the large diameter portion 171 beyond the bottom surface 177, and can reach the rear side end portion 51 c of the circuit board 51.
 なお、この場合、熱伝導性樹脂が回路基板51の後方側端部51cよりも更に前方側にまで達していてもよい。しかし、その分、充填される熱伝導性樹脂の体積が増加し、ランプの重量が重くなるため、ランプ重量が重くなり過ぎない程度に熱伝導性樹脂を充填するのがよい。また、支持台座部21は、電気絶縁性を備えている必要があるため、電機絶縁性を備えた熱伝導性樹脂を用いる必要がある。 In this case, the heat conductive resin may reach the front side further than the rear side end portion 51 c of the circuit board 51. However, since the volume of the heat conductive resin to be filled increases and the weight of the lamp increases, it is preferable to fill the heat conductive resin to such an extent that the lamp weight does not become too heavy. Moreover, since the support base part 21 needs to be provided with electrical insulation, it is necessary to use a heat conductive resin provided with electrical insulation.
 支持台座部21と熱伝導性部材3160とを、別々の材料で形成する場合は、例えば、次のような方法を採用することができる。後方側開口175から大径部171内部に回路ユニット50を挿入した後、ヒートパイプ20の後方側端部20bが挿嵌される凹部が形成された支持台座部21が予め装着された受電部80を小径部172に嵌着する。そして、開口179からヒートパイプ20をケース170内部に挿入して、後方側端部20bを支持台座部21の凹部に挿嵌する。その後、配線用孔114から熱伝導性樹脂充填用のノズル等を挿入して回路基板51の後方側端部51cに達するまで熱伝導性樹脂を充填する。なお、開口179の周縁の一部を切り欠いてヒートパイプ20との間に隙間を形成し、当該隙間からノズルを挿入して熱伝導性樹脂を充填してもよい。また、熱伝導性樹脂充填用のノズル等を挿入するための貫通孔を別途形成してもよい。これらの場合、熱伝導性樹脂充填後、隙間や貫通孔を樹脂等により閉塞してもよい。 When the support pedestal 21 and the heat conductive member 3160 are formed of different materials, for example, the following method can be employed. After the circuit unit 50 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 171 from the rear-side opening 175, the power receiving portion 80 on which the support pedestal portion 21 in which the concave portion into which the rear-side end portion 20b of the heat pipe 20 is inserted is formed is mounted in advance. Is fitted to the small diameter portion 172. Then, the heat pipe 20 is inserted into the case 170 from the opening 179, and the rear side end portion 20 b is inserted into the concave portion of the support base portion 21. Thereafter, a nozzle or the like for filling the heat conductive resin is inserted from the wiring hole 114 and filled with the heat conductive resin until reaching the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51. Note that a part of the periphery of the opening 179 may be cut out to form a gap with the heat pipe 20, and a nozzle may be inserted through the gap to fill the thermally conductive resin. Further, a through hole for inserting a nozzle or the like for filling a heat conductive resin may be formed separately. In these cases, after filling the heat conductive resin, the gaps and through holes may be closed with a resin or the like.
 <変形例36>
 また、図9に示す変形例1に係るランプ400の構成に、熱伝導性部材を適用してもよい。図41は、変形例36に係るランプ3200の概略構成を示す断面図である。同図に示すように、ランプ3200は、熱伝導性部材3160を有する。変形例35に係るランプ3100と同様に、熱伝導性部材3160は、回路基板51の後方側端部51cにまで達しており、ヒートパイプ20のボトム部20aは、熱伝導性部材3160内に埋没している。回路基板51の後方側端部51cとヒートパイプ20のボトム部20a、および後方側端部51cと小径部72とは、熱伝導性部材3160により熱的に接続されている。これにより、本変形例に係るランプ3200においても、変形例35に係るランプ3100と同様に、回路ユニット50の放熱性を向上させることができる。
<Modification 36>
Moreover, you may apply a heat conductive member to the structure of the lamp | ramp 400 which concerns on the modification 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 3200 according to Modification 36. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the lamp 3200 has a heat conductive member 3160. Similar to the lamp 3100 according to the modified example 35, the heat conductive member 3160 reaches the rear side end portion 51c of the circuit board 51, and the bottom portion 20a of the heat pipe 20 is buried in the heat conductive member 3160. is doing. The rear end 51 c of the circuit board 51 and the bottom 20 a of the heat pipe 20, and the rear end 51 c and the small diameter portion 72 are thermally connected by a heat conductive member 3160. Thereby, also in the lamp 3200 according to the present modification, the heat dissipation of the circuit unit 50 can be improved as in the lamp 3100 according to the modification 35.
 <変形例37>
 上記各実施形態および各変形例においては、回路ユニットはケースの大径部内にのみ収容されていたが、これに限られない。例えば、回路ユニットの一部が、小径部内に収容されていてもよい。
<Modification 37>
In each said embodiment and each modification, although the circuit unit was accommodated only in the large diameter part of a case, it is not restricted to this. For example, a part of the circuit unit may be accommodated in the small diameter portion.
 図42は、変形例37に係るランプ3300の概略構成を示す断面図である。図43は、本変形例に係る回路ユニット3350の平面図であり、回路基板3351を平面上に広げた状態で回路基板3351の内周面側から見た平面図である。本変形例においても、回路基板3351は、ポリイミド等の絶縁性を有する材料から成る可撓性の基板である。 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 3300 according to Modification 37. FIG. FIG. 43 is a plan view of a circuit unit 3350 according to this modification, and is a plan view seen from the inner peripheral surface side of the circuit board 3351 in a state where the circuit board 3351 is spread on a plane. Also in this modification, the circuit board 3351 is a flexible board made of an insulating material such as polyimide.
 図43に示すように、回路基板3351は、前方側回路基板部3351Aと、前方側回路基板部3351Aの後方側に連設された後方側回路基板部3351Bとから成る。前方側回路基板部3351Aは、図4に示す実施形態1に係る回路基板51と同様に、扇形の中心部分を、同じ中心角を有するより小さな扇形で切り欠いたような形状をしている。 As shown in FIG. 43, the circuit board 3351 includes a front circuit board part 3351A and a rear circuit board part 3351B connected to the rear side of the front circuit board part 3351A. Similarly to the circuit board 51 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 4, the front circuit board portion 3351A has a shape in which a fan-shaped central portion is cut out by a smaller fan having the same central angle.
 後方側回路基板部3351Bは、前方側回路基板部3351Aの扇の切り欠かれた部分の孤に相当する後方側弧部分3351Acの中央部から後方側に連設されている。なお、本変形例においては、後方側回路基板部3351Bは、後方側弧部分3351Acの中央部から後方側に連設されているが、これに限られない。後方側弧部分3351Acの一部から後方側に連設されていれば中央部に限られず、例えば、側方に寄った位置から連設されていてもよいし、扇形の辺に相当する部分である側端縁を含む側端部から連設されていてもよい。 The rear circuit board part 3351B is connected to the rear side from the center part of the rear arc part 3351Ac corresponding to the arc of the fan-cut part of the front circuit board part 3351A. In the present modification, the rear circuit board portion 3351B is connected to the rear side from the central portion of the rear arc portion 3351Ac, but is not limited thereto. It is not limited to the central part as long as it is connected to the rear side from a part of the rear arc part 3351Ac. For example, it may be connected from a position close to the side, or a part corresponding to a fan-shaped side. You may continue from the side edge part containing a certain side edge.
 電子部品52の多くは、前方側回路基板部3351Aの内周面3351Ab上に実装されているが、一部の電子部品52は、後方側回路基板部3351Bの内周面3351Bb上にも実装されている。 Most of the electronic components 52 are mounted on the inner peripheral surface 3351Ab of the front circuit board portion 3351A, but some of the electronic components 52 are also mounted on the inner peripheral surface 3351Bb of the rear circuit substrate portion 3351B. ing.
 図42に示すように、前方側回路基板部3351Aおよび前方側回路基板部3351Aに実装されている電子部品52は、ケース3370の大径部3371内に収容されている。また、後方側回路基板部3351Bおよび後方側回路基板部3351Bに実装されている電子部品52は、ケース3370の小径部3372内に収容されている。これにより、電子部品52の一部を小径部3372内に配置して、その分、大径部3371内に配置される電子部品52の数を低減させることができるため、ケース3370の小型化を図ることができる。 42, the front circuit board portion 3351A and the electronic component 52 mounted on the front circuit board portion 3351A are accommodated in a large diameter portion 3371 of the case 3370. In addition, the electronic component 52 mounted on the rear circuit board portion 3351B and the rear circuit board portion 3351B is accommodated in the small diameter portion 3372 of the case 3370. Accordingly, a part of the electronic component 52 can be arranged in the small diameter portion 3372, and the number of the electronic components 52 arranged in the large diameter portion 3371 can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.
 また、背が低く、表面実装タイプの電子部品52を、前方側回路基板部3351Aの外周面3351Aaおよび後方側回路基板部3351Bの外周面3351Baに実装してもよい。ここで、図42に示すように、前方側回路基板部3351Aと後方側回路基板部3351Bとが連設している部分を通る回路基板3351の断面は、回路基板3351の前方側端部から後方側端部まで直線状になっている。上記連設している部分は底面3377の内周縁に接触しており、当該接触している部分の前方側において、前方側回路基板部3351Aの外周面3351Aaと大径部3371の内周面3371aとの間に、比較的大きな隙間が存在する。また、上記接触している部分の後方側においても、後方側回路基板部3351Bの外周面3351Baと小径部3372の内周面との間に比較的大きな隙間が存在する。従って、これら比較的大きな隙間部分に、電子部品52を配するとよい。 Further, the electronic component 52 having a short height and the surface mounting type may be mounted on the outer peripheral surface 3351Aa of the front circuit board portion 3351A and the outer peripheral surface 3351Ba of the rear circuit board portion 3351B. Here, as shown in FIG. 42, the cross section of the circuit board 3351 passing through the portion where the front circuit board part 3351A and the rear circuit board part 3351B are connected to each other is rearward from the front side edge of the circuit board 3351. It is linear up to the side edge. The continuous portion is in contact with the inner peripheral edge of the bottom surface 3377, and on the front side of the contacting portion, the outer peripheral surface 3351Aa of the front circuit board portion 3351A and the inner peripheral surface 3371a of the large diameter portion 3371. There is a relatively large gap between the two. In addition, a relatively large gap exists between the outer peripheral surface 3351Ba of the rear circuit board portion 3351B and the inner peripheral surface of the small diameter portion 3372 on the rear side of the contacting portion. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the electronic component 52 in these relatively large gaps.
 本変形例においては、図42に示すように、小径部3372の前方側の内周面のうち、後方側回路基板部3351Bの外周面3351Baと接する部分は、斜めに切り欠かれている。従って、前方側回路基板部3351Aの外周面3351Aaと大径部3371の内周面3371aとの間の隙間を小さくすることができ、大径部3371内において、前方側回路基板部3351Aがより大きく広がることができる。これにより、小径部3372の前方側の内周面が斜めに切り欠かれていない場合と比較して、前方側回路基板部3351Aの面積を大きくすることができる。 42, in the present modification, the portion of the inner peripheral surface on the front side of the small diameter portion 3372 that is in contact with the outer peripheral surface 3351Ba of the rear circuit board portion 3351B is cut obliquely. Accordingly, the gap between the outer peripheral surface 3351Aa of the front circuit board portion 3351A and the inner peripheral surface 3371a of the large diameter portion 3371 can be reduced, and the front circuit board portion 3351A is larger in the large diameter portion 3371. Can spread. Thereby, compared with the case where the inner peripheral surface of the front side of the small diameter portion 3372 is not cut obliquely, the area of the front circuit board portion 3351A can be increased.
 なお、本変形例においては、回路ユニット3350は、ケース3370の後方側開口3375からケース3370内部へと挿入される構成であるが、これに限られない。例えば、本変形例に係る回路ユニット3350を、図12に示す変形例4に係るランプ700に適用した場合には、実装基板711のケース770への取着前に、回路ユニット3350を前方側開口776からケース770の内部に挿入してもよい。 In this modification, the circuit unit 3350 is inserted into the case 3370 from the rear side opening 3375 of the case 3370, but is not limited thereto. For example, when the circuit unit 3350 according to this modification is applied to the lamp 700 according to the modification 4 shown in FIG. 12, the circuit unit 3350 is opened to the front side before the mounting substrate 711 is attached to the case 770. 776 may be inserted into case 770.
 <変形例38>
 回路基板の一部が小径部内に配される構成において、回路基板の形状は、上記変形例37に係る回路基板3351の形状に限られない。例えば、次のような変形例を実施することも可能である。図44(a),(b)は、変形例38に係る回路基板3450の概略構成を模式的に示す図である。図44(a)は、回路基板3451を平面に展開した場合の回路ユニット3450を、内周面3451Abおよび内周面3451Bb側から見た平面図である。図44(b)は、ケース内に収容されている状態における回路ユニット3450の態様を模式的に示す一部切欠き斜視図である。図44(b)においては、わかりやすくするためにケースについては図示を省略しているが、ここでは、回路ユニット3450は、例えば、変形例4に係るケース770に収容される。本変形例においても、回路基板3351は、ポリイミド等の絶縁性および可撓性を有する材料から成るフレキシブル基板である。
<Modification 38>
In the configuration in which a part of the circuit board is arranged in the small diameter portion, the shape of the circuit board is not limited to the shape of the circuit board 3351 according to the modified example 37. For example, the following modifications may be implemented. FIGS. 44A and 44B are views schematically showing a schematic configuration of a circuit board 3450 according to the modified example 38. FIG. FIG. 44A is a plan view of the circuit unit 3450 when the circuit board 3451 is developed on a plane, as viewed from the inner peripheral surface 3451Ab and the inner peripheral surface 3451Bb side. FIG. 44B is a partially cutaway perspective view schematically showing an aspect of the circuit unit 3450 in a state of being accommodated in the case. In FIG. 44B, the case is not shown for the sake of clarity, but here, the circuit unit 3450 is accommodated in the case 770 according to the fourth modification, for example. Also in this modification, the circuit board 3351 is a flexible board made of a material having insulating properties and flexibility such as polyimide.
 図44(a),(b)に示すように、回路基板3451は、前方側回路基板部3451Aと、後方側回路基板部3451Bとが、ブリッジ部3451Cを介して連結された構成を有する。前方側回路基板部3451Aは、扇形の中心部分を、同じ中心角を有するより小さな扇形で切り欠いたような形状をしている。後方側回路基板部3451Bは、扇形の中心部分を、同じ中心角を有するより小さな扇形で切り欠いたような形状から、前方側の中央部分が除外されたような形状をしている。そして、当該除外された部分が、ブリッジ部3451Cとなっている。 44 (a) and 44 (b), the circuit board 3451 has a configuration in which a front circuit board part 3451A and a rear circuit board part 3451B are connected via a bridge part 3451C. The front circuit board portion 3451A has a shape in which a fan-shaped center portion is cut out by a smaller fan shape having the same central angle. The rear circuit board portion 3451B has a shape in which the central portion on the front side is excluded from the shape in which the central portion of the sector is cut out with a smaller sector having the same central angle. The excluded portion is a bridge portion 3451C.
 前方側回路基板部3451Aと、後方側回路基板部3451Bとは、共に筒状に曲げられた状態で、それぞれ大径部および小径部内に収容される。ブリッジ部3451Cは、ケースの底面上に載置される部分であり、ブリッジ部3451Cの長さは、ケースの底面の幅に対応している。 The front circuit board part 3451A and the rear circuit board part 3451B are both accommodated in the large-diameter part and the small-diameter part in a state of being bent into a cylindrical shape. The bridge portion 3451C is a portion placed on the bottom surface of the case, and the length of the bridge portion 3451C corresponds to the width of the bottom surface of the case.
 ここで、後方側回路基板部3451Bの前方側弧部分3451Bcの長さは、前方側回路基板部3451Aの後方側弧部分3451Acの長さよりも短く設定されている。これにより、筒状に曲げられた場合に、前方側回路基板部3451Aの後方側端部の筒の内径よりも、後方側回路基板部3451Bの前方側端部の筒の外径が小さくなる。従って、後方側回路基板部3451Bのブリッジ部3451Cよりも前方側に位置する部分が、前方側回路基板部3451Aと干渉せずに、前方側回路基板部3451Aの筒内に配置される。 Here, the length of the front arc portion 3451Bc of the rear circuit board portion 3451B is set shorter than the length of the rear arc portion 3451Ac of the front circuit board portion 3451A. Thereby, when bent into a cylindrical shape, the outer diameter of the cylinder at the front end of the rear circuit board 3451B is smaller than the inner diameter of the cylinder at the rear end of the front circuit board 3451A. Accordingly, the portion of the rear circuit board portion 3451B that is located in front of the bridge portion 3451C is disposed in the cylinder of the front circuit board portion 3451A without interfering with the front circuit board portion 3451A.
 上記のように、ブリッジ部3451Cが設けられていることにより、前方側回路基板部3451Aと大径部の内周面との間の隙間の大きさを、変形例43に係る回路ユニット3350の場合と比較して小さくすることができる。これにより、回路ユニット3350と比較して、前方側回路基板部3451Aの面積をより大きくすることができる。 As described above, since the bridge portion 3451C is provided, the size of the gap between the front circuit board portion 3451A and the inner peripheral surface of the large-diameter portion can be reduced in the case of the circuit unit 3350 according to the modified example 43. It can be made smaller than Thereby, compared with the circuit unit 3350, the area of the front circuit board part 3451A can be made larger.
 また、後方側回路基板部3451Bと小径部の内周面との間の隙間の大きさを、変形例43に係る回路基板3351の場合と比較して小さくすることができ、小径部内にも後方側回路基板部3451Bを筒状に配置することができる。これにより、回路ユニット3350と比較して、後方側回路基板部3451Bの面積をより大きくすることができる。従って、より多くの電子部品52を後方側回路基板部3451Bに実装することができるため、前方側回路基板部3451Aに実装する電子部品の数を低減し、ケースの小型化に資することができる。 In addition, the size of the gap between the rear circuit board part 3451B and the inner peripheral surface of the small diameter part can be reduced as compared with the case of the circuit board 3351 according to the modified example 43, and the rear part of the small diameter part can be rearward. The side circuit board portion 3451B can be arranged in a cylindrical shape. Thereby, compared with the circuit unit 3350, the area of the back side circuit board part 3451B can be enlarged more. Therefore, since more electronic components 52 can be mounted on the rear circuit board portion 3451B, the number of electronic components mounted on the front circuit board portion 3451A can be reduced, and the case can be reduced in size.
 以上説明したように、本変形例に係る回路ユニット3450の構成によると、前方側回路基板部3451Aおよび後方側回路基板部3451Bの面積をより大きくすることができる。これにより、ケースが小型化された場合においても、電子部品の実装に必要な回路基板の面積を確保して、ランプの小型化に資することができる。 As described above, according to the configuration of the circuit unit 3450 according to this modification, the areas of the front circuit board portion 3451A and the rear circuit board portion 3451B can be further increased. As a result, even when the case is downsized, the area of the circuit board necessary for mounting the electronic component can be ensured to contribute to downsizing of the lamp.
 <変形例39>
 上記各実施形態および各変形例においては、本発明の一態様を電球形ランプおよび直管蛍光灯型ランプに適用した場合を例に説明したが、これに限られない。
<Modification 39>
In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the case where one aspect of the present invention is applied to a light bulb-type lamp and a straight tube fluorescent lamp-type lamp has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
 図45(a),(b)は、変形例39に係るランプ3500の概略構成を示す斜視図である。図45(a)は、後方側から見たランプ3500の斜視図であり、図45(b)は、前方側から見たランプ3500の斜視図である。図46は、ランプ3500の分解斜視図である。なお、図46においては、紙面下方が前方であり、紙面上方が後方である。 45 (a) and 45 (b) are perspective views showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 3500 according to Modification 39. FIG. 45A is a perspective view of the lamp 3500 viewed from the rear side, and FIG. 45B is a perspective view of the lamp 3500 viewed from the front side. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the lamp 3500. In FIG. 46, the lower side of the drawing is the front and the upper side of the drawing is the rear.
 図45(a),(b)に示すように、ランプ3500は、全体としては、円板状または扁平な円柱状の形状を有し、所謂ライトエンジンタイプのランプである。ランプ3500は、例えば外径が50mm~100mm、高さが30mm~50mmである。 45 (a) and 45 (b), the lamp 3500 has a disk shape or a flat columnar shape as a whole, and is a so-called light engine type lamp. For example, the lamp 3500 has an outer diameter of 50 mm to 100 mm and a height of 30 mm to 50 mm.
 図46に示すように、ランプ3500は、主な構成要素として、熱伝導シート3520、支持台3560、充填部材3530、発光部3510、ケース3570、受電部3580、回路ユニット3550、反射鏡3590、カバー部3540等を備える。 As shown in FIG. 46, the lamp 3500 includes a heat conductive sheet 3520, a support 3560, a filling member 3530, a light emitting unit 3510, a case 3570, a power receiving unit 3580, a circuit unit 3550, a reflecting mirror 3590, and a cover as main components. Part 3540 and the like.
 図47(a)は、ケース3570を前方側から見た斜視図である。図47(b)は、ケース3570に発光部3510が取着された状態を模式的に示す斜視図である。図48は、ランプ3500の概略構成を示す断面図である。なお、図48においては、紙面下方が前方であり、紙面上方が後方である。 47 (a) is a perspective view of the case 3570 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 47B is a perspective view schematically showing a state where the light emitting unit 3510 is attached to the case 3570. FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of the lamp 3500. In FIG. 48, the lower side of the drawing is the front and the upper side of the drawing is the rear.
 以下に、各構成要素についてより詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, each component will be described in more detail.
 <発光部>
 発光部3510は、実装基板3511と、実装基板3511上に実装された複数のLED12と、複数のLED12を被覆する封止体13とを備える。実装基板3511は、電気絶縁性および良好な熱伝導性を有する材料を用いて形成されるのが好ましい。電気絶縁性および良好な熱伝導性を有する材料としては、例えば、アルミナや窒化アルミニウム等のセラミックスが挙げられる。また、アルミ、銅等の金属基板と樹脂基板との積層構造を有するようなメタルコア基板等を用いてもよい。
<Light emitting part>
The light emitting unit 3510 includes a mounting substrate 3511, a plurality of LEDs 12 mounted on the mounting substrate 3511, and a sealing body 13 that covers the plurality of LEDs 12. The mounting substrate 3511 is preferably formed using a material having electrical insulation and good thermal conductivity. Examples of the material having electrical insulation and good thermal conductivity include ceramics such as alumina and aluminum nitride. Alternatively, a metal core substrate having a laminated structure of a metal substrate such as aluminum or copper and a resin substrate may be used.
 なお、図45(b),図46および図47(b)においては、LED12は封止体13に覆われて見えないため、封止体13のみが図示されている。 In FIGS. 45 (b), 46 and 47 (b), only the sealing body 13 is shown because the LED 12 is covered with the sealing body 13 and cannot be seen.
 <支持台>
 支持台3560は、発光部3510が充填部材3530を介して取着される基台となる部材である。また、支持台3560は、照明器具に接続される部材である。具体的には、支持台3560の上部には、例えばGH76p形の口金構造が形成され、照明器具に取り付けられ固定される。支持台3560は、発光部3510で発生した熱を照明器具側へと伝熱する役割も果たすため、良好な熱伝導性を有する材料から形成されるのが好適である。良好な熱伝導性を有する材料としては、例えば、アルミ等の金属材料が挙げられる。
<Support stand>
The support 3560 is a member that serves as a base on which the light emitting unit 3510 is attached via the filling member 3530. Moreover, the support stand 3560 is a member connected to a lighting fixture. Specifically, a base structure of, for example, GH76p type is formed on the upper portion of the support base 3560, and is attached and fixed to the lighting fixture. The support base 3560 also plays a role of transferring heat generated in the light emitting unit 3510 to the lighting fixture side, and thus is preferably formed from a material having good thermal conductivity. Examples of the material having good thermal conductivity include metal materials such as aluminum.
 <熱伝導シート>
 熱伝導シート3520は、発光部位3510から充填部材3530を介して支持台3560へと伝わった熱を、照明器具側に伝導して放熱するための熱伝導性のシートである。具体的には、熱伝導シート3520は、ゴムまたは樹脂製のシートであり、例えばシリコンシートまたはアクリルシートである。また、ゴムや樹脂に金属フィラー等を混入させて熱伝導性を向上させたものを使用してもよい。
<Heat conduction sheet>
The heat conductive sheet 3520 is a heat conductive sheet for conducting heat transferred from the light emitting portion 3510 to the support base 3560 through the filling member 3530 to the lighting fixture side and radiating it. Specifically, the heat conductive sheet 3520 is a rubber or resin sheet, for example, a silicon sheet or an acrylic sheet. Moreover, you may use what mixed metal filler etc. in rubber | gum or resin and improved thermal conductivity.
 <ケース>
 ケース3570は、絶縁性を有する樹脂等の材料から形成された筒状の部材であり、大径部3571と小径部3572とから成る。絶縁性を有する樹脂材料としては、例えば、PBT(ポリブチレンテレフタレート)等を用いることができる。
<Case>
The case 3570 is a cylindrical member formed of a material such as an insulating resin, and includes a large diameter portion 3571 and a small diameter portion 3572. As the insulating resin material, for example, PBT (polybutylene terephthalate) or the like can be used.
 大径部3571および小径部3572は、例えば、両側が開口した略円筒形状であって、互いの筒軸が略一致する態様で互いに連設され、一体的に形成されている。大径部3571は、両端に開口を有するが、後方側の端部は、全体が開口とはなっておらず、前方側端部に開口を有する有底筒状の部材の底部の一部に、さらに開口が設けられたような形状をしている。即ち、大径部3571の底部3577の中央部分には、開口3577aが形成されている。底部3577の開口3577aを規定する部分である開口3577aの周縁部分には、後方側に延伸する固定部3573が形成されている。 The large-diameter portion 3571 and the small-diameter portion 3572 are, for example, substantially cylindrical shapes that are open on both sides, and are connected to each other in a manner in which the cylinder axes substantially coincide with each other, and are integrally formed. The large diameter portion 3571 has openings at both ends, but the end on the rear side is not an opening as a whole, and is part of the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical member having an opening at the front end. Further, the shape is such that an opening is provided. That is, an opening 3577 a is formed in the central portion of the bottom 3577 of the large diameter portion 3571. A fixing portion 3573 extending rearward is formed on a peripheral portion of the opening 3577a that is a portion that defines the opening 3577a of the bottom portion 3577.
 底部3577には、ネジ穴3577bが複数形成されており、固定用ネジ3503によってケース3570は支持台3560に固定される。このとき、発光部3510の実装基板3511が固定部3573と支持台3560との間に挟まれ、これにより、発光部3510がケース3570の後方側に取着される。またこのとき、開口3577a内にLED12および封止体13が位置する状態で、発光部3510がケース3570に取着される。また、開口3577aは、実装基板3511により閉塞されている。なお、図47(b)においては、LED12は封止体13により覆われていて見えない。 A plurality of screw holes 3577 b are formed in the bottom portion 3577, and the case 3570 is fixed to the support base 3560 with fixing screws 3503. At this time, the mounting substrate 3511 of the light emitting unit 3510 is sandwiched between the fixing unit 3573 and the support base 3560, whereby the light emitting unit 3510 is attached to the rear side of the case 3570. At this time, the light emitting unit 3510 is attached to the case 3570 in a state where the LED 12 and the sealing body 13 are positioned in the opening 3577a. Further, the opening 3577a is closed by the mounting substrate 3511. In FIG. 47B, the LED 12 is covered with the sealing body 13 and cannot be seen.
 大径部3571の内部には、回路ユニット3550および反射鏡3590が収容されている。そして、これらが大径部3571の内部に収容された状態で、大径部3571の前方側端部にカバー部3540が取着されている。即ち、カバー部3540により、前方側開口3571aが閉塞されている。 A circuit unit 3550 and a reflecting mirror 3590 are accommodated in the large diameter portion 3571. And the cover part 3540 is attached to the front side edge part of the large diameter part 3571 in the state accommodated in the inside of the large diameter part 3571. That is, the front side opening 3571a is closed by the cover portion 3540.
 ケース3570の大径部3571の内周面3571bの前方側には、凹部3571b1が周方向に互いに間隔を開けて複数形成されている。 A plurality of recesses 3571b1 are formed on the front side of the inner peripheral surface 3571b of the large-diameter portion 3571 of the case 3570 at intervals in the circumferential direction.
 <充填部材>
 充填部材3530は、支持台3560と実装基板3511との間に配置され、実装基板3511が、支持台3560とケース3570の固定部3573との間に挟まれた際に、緩衝剤の役割を果たすシート状の部材である。従って、充填部材3530には、ある程度弾性を有し、ある程度変形を許容することができる材料を用いるとよい。
<Filling member>
The filling member 3530 is disposed between the support base 3560 and the mounting substrate 3511. When the mounting substrate 3511 is sandwiched between the support base 3560 and the fixing portion 3573 of the case 3570, the filling member 3530 serves as a buffer. It is a sheet-like member. Therefore, the filling member 3530 may be made of a material that has elasticity to some extent and can allow deformation to some extent.
 また、充填部材3530は、実装基板3511と支持台3560とを熱的に接続して、発光部3510からの熱を支持台3560へと円滑に伝導するために、熱伝導性を有する材料から形成されるのがよい。さらに、充填部材3530は、実装基板3511と支持台3560との間の電気絶縁性を確保するために、電気絶縁性を有する材料から形成されるのがより好適である。充填部材3530が形成される具体的な材料としては、ゴムや樹脂等を用いることができる。ゴムとしては、例えば、シリコーンゴムやブチルゴム等を用いることができる。樹脂としては、例えば、シリコーン樹脂やアクリル樹脂等を用いることができる。 In addition, the filling member 3530 is formed of a material having thermal conductivity in order to thermally connect the mounting substrate 3511 and the support base 3560 and smoothly conduct heat from the light emitting unit 3510 to the support base 3560. It is good to be done. Furthermore, the filling member 3530 is more preferably formed of a material having electrical insulation properties in order to ensure electrical insulation properties between the mounting substrate 3511 and the support base 3560. As a specific material for forming the filling member 3530, rubber, resin, or the like can be used. For example, silicone rubber or butyl rubber can be used as the rubber. As the resin, for example, a silicone resin or an acrylic resin can be used.
 <反射鏡>
 反射鏡3590は、大径部3571内に収容され、発光部3510から出射される光を反射して、カバー部3540を介してランプ3500の前方側に出射させるための光学部材である。反射鏡3590は、後方側から前方側に向かうにつれて漸次拡径する円筒状の反射鏡本体部3591と、反射鏡本体部3591の前方側端部3591aに連設された、平面視円環状の板状部材であるフランジ部3592とから構成されている。
<Reflector>
The reflecting mirror 3590 is an optical member that is housed in the large-diameter portion 3571, reflects the light emitted from the light emitting portion 3510, and emits the light to the front side of the lamp 3500 via the cover portion 3540. The reflecting mirror 3590 is a circular plate in a plan view that is connected to a cylindrical reflecting mirror main body 3591 that gradually increases in diameter from the rear side toward the front side, and a front end 3591a of the reflecting mirror main body 3591. It is comprised from the flange part 3592 which is a shape member.
 反射鏡本体部3591の後方側端部3591bは、大径部3571の開口3577aから小径部3572内に挿入されている。反射鏡本体部3591の後方側開口内に発光部3510の封止体13により封止されたLED12が位置している。これにより、LED12から発せられた光は、反射鏡本体部3591の後方側開口を介して反射鏡本体部3591の筒内空間へと出射される。 The rear end 3591b of the reflector main body 3591 is inserted into the small diameter portion 3572 from the opening 3577a of the large diameter portion 3571. The LED 12 sealed by the sealing body 13 of the light emitting unit 3510 is located in the rear side opening of the reflecting mirror main body 3591. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 12 is emitted to the in-cylinder space of the reflecting mirror main body 3591 through the rear opening of the reflecting mirror main body 3591.
 反射鏡3590は、ポリカーボネート等の絶縁性を有する樹脂材料によって形成されている。反射鏡3590は、反射率を向上させるために、少なくとも反射鏡本体部3591は白色の樹脂材料によって形成されている。これにより、発光部3510から反射鏡本体部3591の筒内空間へと出射された光は、反射鏡本体部3591の内周面3591cで前方側へと反射される。 The reflecting mirror 3590 is formed of an insulating resin material such as polycarbonate. In order to improve the reflectance of the reflecting mirror 3590, at least the reflecting mirror main body 3591 is formed of a white resin material. Accordingly, light emitted from the light emitting unit 3510 to the in-cylinder space of the reflecting mirror main body 3591 is reflected to the front side by the inner peripheral surface 3591c of the reflecting mirror main body 3591.
 また、反射鏡本体部3591の後方側端部は、実装基板3511に接しており、固定部3573とともに、実装基板3511を支持台3560との間に挟んで固定する役割を果たしている。フランジ部3592の外径は、大径部3571の内径と略等しいか、または若干小さく設定されている。また、フランジ部3592は、カバー部3540に接している。これにより、反射鏡3590は、大径部3571内部において、ガタつくことなく安定的に保持収容されている。 Further, the rear side end of the reflector main body 3591 is in contact with the mounting board 3511 and plays a role of fixing the mounting board 3511 between the support base 3560 and the fixing part 3573. The outer diameter of the flange portion 3592 is set to be approximately equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large diameter portion 3571. Further, the flange portion 3592 is in contact with the cover portion 3540. Thereby, the reflecting mirror 3590 is stably held and accommodated in the large diameter portion 3571 without rattling.
 なお、反射鏡本体部3591の内周面3591cに金属薄膜等から成る反射膜を蒸着やコーティング等により形成して、反射率を向上させてもよい。 Note that a reflective film made of a metal thin film or the like may be formed on the inner peripheral surface 3591c of the reflector main body 3591 by vapor deposition, coating, or the like to improve the reflectance.
 <回路ユニット>
 回路ユニット3550は、主にLED12を点灯させるためのものであり、回路基板3551と、当該回路基板3551上に配された各種の電子部品52とを有している。回路基板3551は、例えば、電気絶縁性と可撓性を有するポリイミド等の樹脂から成る。回路基板3551は、図46および図48に示すように、電子部品52が実装されている側の主面である内周面3551bを内側にし、ケース3570の大径部3571の内周面3571bに沿って湾曲した態様で、大径部3571内において、反射鏡3590と大径部3571の内周面3571bとの間の空間に収容されている。これにより、回路基板が平面視円環状の平板な部材として形成され、ケースの筒軸と直交する姿勢で大径部3571の底部3577に取着される場合と比較して、回路基板の面積を増大させることができる。従って、ランプ3500の小型化に伴いケース3570が小型化された場合においても、必要な電子部品を実装するのに十分な回路基板の実装面積を確保することができる。これにより、ランプの小型化に資することができる。
<Circuit unit>
The circuit unit 3550 is mainly for turning on the LED 12, and includes a circuit board 3551 and various electronic components 52 arranged on the circuit board 3551. The circuit board 3551 is made of, for example, a resin such as polyimide having electrical insulation and flexibility. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 48, the circuit board 3551 has an inner peripheral surface 3551b which is a main surface on which the electronic component 52 is mounted on the inner side, and an inner peripheral surface 3571b of the large diameter portion 3571 of the case 3570. It is housed in a space between the reflecting mirror 3590 and the inner peripheral surface 3571b of the large-diameter portion 3571 in the large-diameter portion 3571 in a curved manner along the line. Thereby, the circuit board is formed as a flat plate member having an annular shape in plan view, and compared with the case where the circuit board is attached to the bottom 3577 of the large-diameter portion 3571 in a posture orthogonal to the cylindrical axis of the case, the area of the circuit board is reduced. Can be increased. Therefore, even when the case 3570 is miniaturized as the lamp 3500 is miniaturized, a circuit board mounting area sufficient to mount necessary electronic components can be secured. Thereby, it can contribute to size reduction of a lamp.
 なおここで、図48に示すように、反射鏡本体部3591は、後方側から前方側に向かうにつれて拡径する形状であるため、反射鏡本体部3591と大径部3571の内周面3571bとの間の空間は、後方側ほど大きくなっている。従って、電子部品52のうち背の高い電子部品52aを回路基板3551の後方側に配置するのが好適である。 Here, as shown in FIG. 48, the reflecting mirror main body 3591 has a shape that increases in diameter from the rear side toward the front side, and therefore, the reflecting mirror main body portion 3591 and the inner peripheral surface 3571b of the large diameter portion 3571 The space between is larger on the rear side. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the tall electronic component 52 a among the electronic components 52 on the rear side of the circuit board 3551.
 なお、本変形例の場合においても、全ての電子部品52が回路基板3551の内周面3551b上に配置されていなくてもよく、例えば、一部の電子部品52が回路基板3551の外周面3551a上に配置されていてもよい。その場合、背の低い電子部品52を外周面3551a上に配置するとよい。外周面3551a上に実装する電子部品52は、表面実装型の電子部品52であると、なお好適である。 Even in the case of this modification, not all electronic components 52 may be arranged on the inner peripheral surface 3551b of the circuit board 3551. For example, some of the electronic components 52 are outer peripheral surfaces 3551a of the circuit board 3551. It may be arranged above. In that case, the short electronic component 52 may be disposed on the outer peripheral surface 3551a. The electronic component 52 to be mounted on the outer peripheral surface 3551a is more preferably a surface-mount type electronic component 52.
 <受電部>
 受電部3580は、一対の電気接続ピン3581から成る。図45(a)に示すように、電気接続ピン3581は、大径部3571の底部3577において小径部3572の外側に位置する部分に設けられた貫通孔3577cから大径部3571の外部に向けて突出している。電気接続ピン3581の当該突出している側の端部である後方側端部3581aは、ランプ3500が照明器具に取着された際に、照明器具のソケット内に設けられた電極と接触して、外部から電力を受電する。
<Power receiving unit>
The power receiving unit 3580 includes a pair of electrical connection pins 3581. As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the electrical connection pin 3581 extends from a through hole 3577 c provided in a portion located outside the small diameter portion 3572 at the bottom 3577 of the large diameter portion 3571 toward the outside of the large diameter portion 3571. It protrudes. When the lamp 3500 is attached to the lighting fixture, the rear side end 3581a, which is the protruding portion of the electrical connection pin 3581, contacts an electrode provided in the socket of the lighting fixture, Receive power from outside.
 電気接続ピン3581の後方側端部3581aとは反対側の端部であり、大径部3571内部に収容されている側の端部である前方側端部3581bには、配線53の一端が接続されており、配線53の他端は、回路基板3551上に形成された不図示の電極に接続されている。これにより、電気接続ピン3581と回路ユニット3550とが電気的に接続されている。 One end of the wiring 53 is connected to the front end 3581b which is the end opposite to the rear end 3581a of the electrical connection pin 3581 and is the end accommodated in the large diameter portion 3571. The other end of the wiring 53 is connected to an electrode (not shown) formed on the circuit board 3551. Thereby, the electrical connection pin 3581 and the circuit unit 3550 are electrically connected.
 <透光性カバー>
 カバー部3540は、ケース3570の内部に配置された部材を保護するためにケース3570の前方側に取り付けられた扁平な有底円筒状の部材である。カバー部3540は、筒の底部分に相当する前面カバー3541と、筒の側壁部分に相当する側壁部3542と、側壁部3542から後方側に延設された爪状部3543等を有する。
<Translucent cover>
The cover portion 3540 is a flat bottomed cylindrical member attached to the front side of the case 3570 in order to protect the member disposed inside the case 3570. The cover part 3540 includes a front cover 3541 corresponding to the bottom part of the cylinder, a side wall part 3542 corresponding to the side wall part of the cylinder, a claw-like part 3543 extending from the side wall part 3542 to the rear side, and the like.
 側壁部3542が、大径部3571の前方側開口3571aから大径部3571内に嵌め込まれ、爪状部3543が、大径部3571の内周面3571bに設けられた凹部3571b1と係合することにより、カバー部3540がケース3570に取着される。なお、カバー部3540のケース3570への取着は、上記係合構造に限られず、例えば、接着剤、リベット、ネジ等を利用してもよい。 The side wall portion 3542 is fitted into the large diameter portion 3571 from the front opening 3571a of the large diameter portion 3571, and the claw-shaped portion 3543 is engaged with the concave portion 3571b1 provided on the inner peripheral surface 3571b of the large diameter portion 3571. Thus, the cover portion 3540 is attached to the case 3570. Note that the attachment of the cover portion 3540 to the case 3570 is not limited to the above engagement structure, and for example, an adhesive, a rivet, a screw, or the like may be used.
 カバー部3540は、ポリカーボネートなどの光透過率の高い樹脂材料を用いて形成されている。従って、発光部3510から出射された光および反射鏡本体部3591の内周面3591cで反射された光は、カバー部3540を透過してランプ3500の前方へと出射される。 The cover portion 3540 is formed using a resin material having a high light transmittance such as polycarbonate. Accordingly, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 3510 and the light reflected by the inner peripheral surface 3591c of the reflector main body 3591 are transmitted through the cover 3540 and emitted to the front of the lamp 3500.
 なお、カバー部3540の内面には、光拡散性を向上させるために、シリカ等を含有した塗料が塗布されていてもよい。さらに、カバー部3540の内面に、微小な凹部(ディンプル)を多数形成したり、フロスト加工を施したりして光拡散性を向上させてもよい。 Note that a paint containing silica or the like may be applied to the inner surface of the cover portion 3540 in order to improve light diffusibility. Further, the light diffusibility may be improved by forming a large number of minute recesses (dimples) on the inner surface of the cover portion 3540 or performing frost processing.
 また、カバー部3540に、蛍光体等の光波長変換部材が含まれていてもよい。この場合、カバー部3540によって発光部から発せられた光の波長を変換し、光色を変換することができる。 Further, the cover portion 3540 may include a light wavelength conversion member such as a phosphor. In this case, the wavelength of the light emitted from the light emitting unit by the cover unit 3540 can be converted to convert the light color.
 以上説明したように、本変形例の構成によっても、回路基板3551が可撓性を有するフレキシブル基板であるため、回路基板3551がケース3570の大径部3571の内周面に沿って湾曲した態様で回路ユニット3550が大径部3571内に収容される。これにより、回路基板がケースの筒軸と直交する姿勢でケース内に収容されている場合および、剛性を有する平板状の回路基板が筒軸に沿った姿勢(または筒軸に対して若干傾いた姿勢)でケース内に収容されている場合と比較して、次のような効果が得られる。即ち、ケース3570内部の空間(ここでは、大径部3571内部の空間)に対して、回路基板3551の面積をより大きくすることができる。これにより、ケース3570を小型化した場合においても、複数の電子部品52を実装するのに必要な回路基板3551の面積を確保することができ、ランプ3500の小型化に資することができる。 As described above, the circuit board 3551 is a flexible flexible board even in the configuration of this modification, and thus the circuit board 3551 is curved along the inner peripheral surface of the large-diameter portion 3571 of the case 3570. Thus, the circuit unit 3550 is accommodated in the large diameter portion 3571. As a result, when the circuit board is accommodated in the case in a posture orthogonal to the cylindrical axis of the case, the rigid flat circuit board is slightly inclined with respect to the cylindrical axis (or slightly inclined with respect to the cylindrical axis). The following effects can be obtained as compared with the case of being housed in the case in the posture). That is, the area of the circuit board 3551 can be made larger than the space inside the case 3570 (here, the space inside the large diameter portion 3571). Thus, even when the case 3570 is downsized, the area of the circuit board 3551 necessary for mounting the plurality of electronic components 52 can be secured, and the lamp 3500 can be downsized.
 <変形例40>
 変形例11および変形例21においては、回路基板を湾曲させて、対向する2辺を接着剤等により接着し、回路基板を円筒形状にした場合について説明した。しかし、回路基板を円筒形状にする方法は、これに限られない。例えば、コネクタ等の連結部材を用いてもよい。
<Modification 40>
In the modified example 11 and the modified example 21, the case where the circuit board is curved and the two opposing sides are bonded with an adhesive or the like to make the circuit board cylindrical has been described. However, the method of making the circuit board cylindrical is not limited to this. For example, a connecting member such as a connector may be used.
 図49は、変形例40に係る回路ユニット3650の概略構成を示す斜視図である。本変形例においても、回路ユニット3650は、可撓性を有する絶縁性の回路基板3651と、回路基板3651の内周面3651b上に実装された各種電子部品52等を有する。 FIG. 49 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a circuit unit 3650 according to Modification 40. FIG. Also in this modification, the circuit unit 3650 includes a flexible insulating circuit board 3651 and various electronic components 52 mounted on the inner peripheral surface 3651b of the circuit board 3651.
 回路基板3651の外周面3651a上には、連結部材3658が設けられている。連結部材3658は、コネクタ3658aおよび、コネクタ3658aが接続されるソケット3658bから構成されている。コネクタ3658aは、回路基板3651の扇形の辺に相当する部分である側端部における外周面3651a上に取着された基部3658a1と、基部3658a1から回路基板3651の外側へと突出するように連設された爪状部3658a2とから成る。基部3658a1と爪状部3658a2とは一体的に形成されている。 A connecting member 3658 is provided on the outer peripheral surface 3651a of the circuit board 3651. The connecting member 3658 includes a connector 3658a and a socket 3658b to which the connector 3658a is connected. The connector 3658a is connected to the base 3658a1 attached on the outer peripheral surface 3651a at the side end portion corresponding to the fan-shaped side of the circuit board 3651, so as to protrude from the base 3658a1 to the outside of the circuit board 3651. Claw-shaped portion 3658a2. The base 3658a1 and the claw-like portion 3658a2 are integrally formed.
 回路基板3651の一方の側端部の外周面3651a上には、コネクタ3658aが一対設けられている。回路基板3651の他方の側端部の外周面3651a上のコネクタ3658aに対応する位置には、ソケット3658bが一対設けられている。コネクタ3658aおよびソケット3658bは、共に樹脂等から形成されている。 A pair of connectors 3658 a are provided on the outer peripheral surface 3651 a at one side end of the circuit board 3651. A pair of sockets 3658b are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors 3658a on the outer peripheral surface 3651a at the other side end of the circuit board 3651. Both the connector 3658a and the socket 3658b are formed of resin or the like.
 図49に示すように、内周面3651bを内側にして回路基板3651が湾曲された状態で、コネクタ3658aの爪状部3658a2がソケット3658bの挿入穴3658b1に挿入される。すると、爪状部3658a2の爪頭部分3658a2aがソケット3658bの係合穴3658b2に嵌り、互いに係合する。これにより、回路基板3651の両側端部が結合されて、回路基板3651の形状が円筒状に保持される。 49, the claw-like portion 3658a2 of the connector 3658a is inserted into the insertion hole 3658b1 of the socket 3658b in a state where the circuit board 3651 is curved with the inner peripheral surface 3651b facing inward. Then, the claw head portion 3658a2a of the claw-like portion 3658a2 fits into the engagement hole 3658b2 of the socket 3658b and engages with each other. As a result, both end portions of the circuit board 3651 are coupled to hold the circuit board 3651 in a cylindrical shape.
 <変形例41>
 回路基板を円筒形状にするための連結部材については、次のような変形例を実施することもできる。
<Modification 41>
About the connection member for making a circuit board into a cylindrical shape, the following modifications can also be implemented.
 図50(a)は、変形例41に係る回路ユニット3750の概略構成を示す斜視図である。図50(a)に示すように、回路ユニット3750の回路基板3751は、両側端部間に隙間が開いた状態で連結部材3758により連結され、円筒状に保持されている。連結部材3758は、長尺のひも状部材3758aの両端にコネクタヘッド3758bがそれぞれ取着されて成る。 FIG. 50A is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of a circuit unit 3750 according to the modified example 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the circuit board 3751 of the circuit unit 3750 is connected by a connecting member 3758 with a gap between both end portions, and is held in a cylindrical shape. The connecting member 3758 is formed by attaching connector heads 3758b to both ends of a long string-like member 3758a.
 図50(b)は、コネクタヘッド3758bが回路基板3751に接続される態様を示す要部拡大斜視図である。コネクタヘッド3758bは、直方体状のヘッド基部3758b1と、ヘッド基部3758b1に連設された爪状部3758b2とから成る。回路基板3751の両側端部には、貫通孔3751eが、それぞれ一対ずつ、合計4つ形成されている。図50(b)は、4つの貫通孔3751eのうちの1つのみを示している。そして、図50(b)に示すように、貫通孔3751eに爪状部3758b2が挿入されて双方が互いに係合することにより、コネクタヘッド3758bが回路基板3751に取着される。これにより、図50(a)に示すように、回路基板3751の形状が円筒状に保持される。 FIG. 50B is an enlarged perspective view of a main part showing a mode in which the connector head 3758b is connected to the circuit board 3751. The connector head 3758b includes a rectangular parallelepiped head base 3758b1 and a claw-shaped portion 3758b2 connected to the head base 3758b1. A total of four through-holes 3751e are formed at both end portions of the circuit board 3751, one pair each. FIG. 50 (b) shows only one of the four through holes 3751e. Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the claw-like portion 3758 b 2 is inserted into the through hole 3751 e and the both engage with each other, whereby the connector head 3758 b is attached to the circuit board 3751. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 50A, the shape of the circuit board 3751 is held in a cylindrical shape.
 本変形例に係る連結部材3758によると、コネクタヘッド3758bの係合相手が、回路基板3751に設けられた貫通孔であるため、変形例40に係る連結部材3658のソケットのような別部材を用いなくてもよい。これにより、省資源化およびコスト抑制に資することができる。 According to the connecting member 3758 according to the present modification, the mating partner of the connector head 3758b is a through-hole provided in the circuit board 3751. Therefore, another member such as a socket of the connecting member 3658 according to the modified example 40 is used. It does not have to be. Thereby, it can contribute to resource saving and cost control.
 また、本変形例においては、回路基板3751の両側端部間に隙間が開いている。これにより、例えば、連結部材3758を用いて、変形例38に係る回路基板3451の後方側回路基板部3451Bを円筒状の形状に保持した場合に、次のような利点がある。即ち、回路基板3451と受電部80(図12参照)のシェル部81とを電気的に接続するための配線53を、回路基板両側端部間の隙間を通すことができるため、配線が容易で、配線が長くなるのを防ぐことができる。 Further, in the present modification, a gap is opened between both end portions of the circuit board 3751. Thereby, for example, when the rear side circuit board part 3451B of the circuit board 3451 according to the modification 38 is held in a cylindrical shape using the connecting member 3758, the following advantages are obtained. That is, since the wiring 53 for electrically connecting the circuit board 3451 and the shell portion 81 of the power receiving unit 80 (see FIG. 12) can be passed through the gaps between both side ends of the circuit board, wiring is easy. The wiring can be prevented from becoming long.
 <変形例42>
 上記各実施形態および各変形例においては、粘着剤や接着剤を用いてケースの底面に回路基板の後方側端部を固定する構成について説明した。また、図13に示す変形例5に係るランプ800のように、ケース870の底面877に凹入する態様で形成された溝部877aに回路基板51の後方側端部51cが挿嵌されて固定される構成について説明した。しかし、回路基板のケース内における固定は、これらに限られない。
<Modification 42>
In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the configuration in which the rear side end of the circuit board is fixed to the bottom surface of the case using an adhesive or an adhesive has been described. Further, like the lamp 800 according to the modified example 5 shown in FIG. 13, the rear side end portion 51 c of the circuit board 51 is inserted into and fixed to the groove portion 877 a formed so as to be recessed into the bottom surface 877 of the case 870. The configuration has been described. However, the fixing of the circuit board in the case is not limited to these.
 図51は、変形例42に係るランプ3800の概略構成を示す断面図である。同図に示すように、ランプ3800のケース3870は、大径部3871の底面3877から前方に突出する固定用突起部3877bを複数有する。固定用突起部3877bは、棒状の突起であり、先端が鉤爪状になっている。固定用突起部3877bと大径部3871の内周面3871aとの間の距離は、回路基板51の厚みと略一致している。固定用突起部3877bは、平面視した場合に、周方向に互いに間隔を開けて円環状に配設されている。 FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a lamp 3800 according to the modified example 42. As shown in the figure, the case 3870 of the lamp 3800 has a plurality of fixing protrusions 3877 b protruding forward from the bottom surface 3877 of the large diameter portion 3871. The fixing projection 3877b is a rod-like projection, and the tip has a claw shape. The distance between the fixing protrusion 3877 b and the inner peripheral surface 3871 a of the large diameter portion 3871 is substantially the same as the thickness of the circuit board 51. The fixing protrusions 3877b are arranged in an annular shape with a space therebetween in the circumferential direction when viewed in plan.
 実装基板711が突起部3878に固定されるのに先立って、前方側開口3876から回路ユニット50が大径部3871内に挿入される。そして、固定用突起部3877bと大径部3871の内周面3871aとの間に回路基板51の後方側端部51cが差し込まれ、回路基板51が大径部3871内に固定される。 Prior to the mounting substrate 711 being fixed to the protrusion 3878, the circuit unit 50 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 3871 from the front opening 3876. Then, the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51 is inserted between the fixing projection 3877b and the inner peripheral surface 3871a of the large diameter part 3871, and the circuit board 51 is fixed in the large diameter part 3871.
 ここで、固定用突起部3877bは、先端が鉤爪状になっているため、回路基板51の後方側端部51cに引っかかり、回路基板51が抜けにくい。 Here, since the fixing protrusion 3877b has a claw-like tip, it is caught by the rear end 51c of the circuit board 51, and the circuit board 51 is difficult to come off.
 なお、回路基板51の内周面51bのうち、固定用突起部3877bの鉤爪と接触する部分には、電子部品52は配置されていない。また、当該部分には、配線パターンも形成されていないのが好適である。 Note that the electronic component 52 is not disposed in a portion of the inner peripheral surface 51b of the circuit board 51 that is in contact with the claw of the fixing projection 3877b. Further, it is preferable that no wiring pattern is formed in the portion.
 固定用突起部3877bは、先端が鉤爪状になった態様に限られず、円柱状の突起でもよい。 The fixing protrusion 3877b is not limited to the form having a claw-like tip, and may be a columnar protrusion.
 本変形例においては、固定用突起部3877bは、平面視で周方向に互いに間隔を開けて円環状に複数配置されていたが、これに限られない。例えば、平面視で一続きの円環状の突出部であってもよい。さらには、円環状の突出部が一続きではなく、一部が欠損して隙間が開いていてもよい。 In the present modification, the plurality of fixing protrusions 3877b are arranged in a ring shape with a space in the circumferential direction in a plan view, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a continuous annular protrusion in plan view. Furthermore, the annular projecting portion may not be continuous, but a part thereof may be lost and a gap may be opened.
 なお、上記各実施形態に係るランプの部分的な構成、および上記各変形例に係る構成を、適宜組み合わせてなるランプであっても良い。また、上記各実施形態および各変形例における説明に記載した材料、数値等は好ましいものを例示しているだけであり、それに限定されることはない。また、各図面は、模式的な図であり、各部材の寸法および比は、一例として挙げたもので、必ずしも実在のランプの寸法および比と一致するとは限らない。さらに、本発明の技術的思想の範囲を逸脱しない範囲で、ランプの構成に適宜変更を加えることは可能である。 It should be noted that the lamp may be a combination of the partial configuration of the lamp according to each of the above embodiments and the configuration according to each of the above modifications as appropriate. In addition, the materials, numerical values, and the like described in the description of each of the above embodiments and modifications are merely preferable examples, and are not limited thereto. Moreover, each drawing is a schematic diagram, and the dimensions and ratios of the members are given as examples, and do not necessarily match the actual dimensions and ratios of the lamps. Furthermore, it is possible to appropriately change the configuration of the lamp without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention.
 1,100,200,300,400,500,600,700,800,900,1000,1100,1200,1300,1400,1500,1600,1700,1800,1900,2000,2100,2200,2300,2400,2500,2600,2700,2800,2900,3000,3100,3200,3300,3500,3800 ランプ
 10,110,210,710,1410,1510,1610,2010,2410,2610,3510 発光部
 11,111,211,311,711,1411,2011,2411,2611,3511 実装基板
 12,312,312a LED(半導体発光素子)
 13 封止体
 20,320,420,520,620,1420,1620 ヒートパイプ
 40,1740,1840 グローブ
 50,250,350,950,1050,1250,2150,2250,2350,3350,3450,35503650,3750 回路ユニット
 51,251,351a,351b,951,1051,1151,1251a,1251b,2151,2251,2351,3351,3451,3551,3651,3751 回路基板
 52,52a 電子部品
 70,170,270,770,870,1070,1370,2470,3370,3570,3870 ケース
 71,171,771,871,1071,2471,3371,3571,3871 大径部
 80,380,3580 受電部
 178,2478 前面
 240,3540 カバー部
 241,3541 前面カバー
 271,371,1271,1371 第1ケース部
 272,371,1271,1372 第2ケース部
 272a 窓部
 340 バルブ
 521,621 凹部
 954 筒状部材
 1250a 第1回路ユニット部
 1250b 第2回路ユニット部
 2420,2620,2720 支持具
 2490,2590,2890 光学部材
 2721 ヒートシンク
 2891 星状部材
1,100,200,300,400,500,600,700,800,900,1000,1100,1200,1300,1400,1500,1600,1700,1800,1900,2000,2100,2200,2300,2400, 2500, 2600, 2700, 2800, 2900, 3000, 3100, 3200, 3300, 3500, 3800 Lamp 10, 110, 210, 710, 1410, 1510, 1610, 2010, 2410, 2610, 3510 Light emitting part 11, 111, 211 , 311, 711, 1411, 2011, 2141, 2611, 3511 Mounting substrate 12, 312, 312 a LED (semiconductor light emitting element)
13 Sealed body 20,320,420,520,620,1420,1620 Heat pipe 40,1740,1840 Globe 50,250,350,950,1050,1250,2150,2250,2350,3350,3450,35503650,3750 Circuit unit 51,251,351a, 351b, 951,1051,1151,1251a, 1251b, 2151,2251,2351,3351,3451,3551,3651,3751 Circuit board 52,52a Electronic component 70,170,270,770, 870, 1070, 1370, 2470, 3370, 3570, 3870 Case 71, 171, 771, 871, 1071, 2471, 3371, 3571, 3871 Large diameter part 80, 380, 3580 Power receiving part 78, 2478 Front surface 240, 3540 Cover portion 241, 3541 Front cover 271, 371, 1271, 1371 First case portion 272, 371, 1271, 1372 Second case portion 272a Window portion 340 Valve 521, 621 Recessed portion 954 Cylindrical member 1250a 1st circuit unit part 1250b 2nd circuit unit part 2420, 2620, 2720 Support tool 2490, 2590, 2890 Optical member 2721 Heat sink 2891 Star-shaped member

Claims (43)

  1.  複数の半導体発光素子が実装基板上に配置されて成る発光部と、外部から電力を受電する受電部と、複数の電子部品およびそれらが実装された回路基板を有する回路ユニットと、前記回路ユニットを収容する筒状または椀状のケースと、を備えるランプであって、
     前記回路ユニットは、前記回路基板が前記ケースの内周面に沿った態様で、当該ケース内に収容されている
     ことを特徴とするランプ。
    A light emitting unit in which a plurality of semiconductor light emitting elements are arranged on a mounting substrate; a power receiving unit that receives power from outside; a circuit unit having a plurality of electronic components and a circuit board on which they are mounted; and the circuit unit A cylindrical or bowl-shaped case to be housed,
    The lamp is characterized in that the circuit unit is housed in the case such that the circuit board is along the inner peripheral surface of the case.
  2.  前記複数の電子部品は、前記回路基板からの高さが異なるものを含み、
     前記回路基板の前記ケースの内周面から遠い側の主面上には、前記複数の電子部品のうち少なくとも前記回路基板からの高さが最も高い前記電子部品が実装されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載のランプ。
    The plurality of electronic components include ones having different heights from the circuit board,
    The electronic component having the highest height from at least the circuit board among the plurality of electronic components is mounted on a main surface of the circuit board far from the inner peripheral surface of the case. The lamp according to claim 1.
  3.  前記回路基板は、可撓性を有する板状の部材より成る
     ことを特徴とする請求項1または2に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 1, wherein the circuit board is made of a plate-like member having flexibility.
  4.  前記回路基板は、前記ケースの内周面または底面に固定されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から3のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the circuit board is fixed to an inner peripheral surface or a bottom surface of the case.
  5.  前記受電部は、前記ケースに取着されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から4のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the power reception unit is attached to the case.
  6.  前記回路基板は、筒状に形成されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から5のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the circuit board is formed in a cylindrical shape.
  7.  前記ケース内部に固定された筒状部材をさらに有し、
     前記回路基板は、前記筒状部材の周面に固定されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項6に記載のランプ。
    It further has a cylindrical member fixed inside the case,
    The lamp according to claim 6, wherein the circuit board is fixed to a peripheral surface of the cylindrical member.
  8.  前記回路基板は、平面上に展開した場合に矩形状である可撓性の板状部材の対向する2辺が接着されることにより筒状に形成されて成る
     ことを特徴とする請求項6に記載のランプ。
    The circuit board is formed in a cylindrical shape by bonding two opposing sides of a flexible plate-shaped member that is rectangular when deployed on a plane. The lamp described.
  9.  前記回路基板は、平面視した場合において多角形の1辺を欠いた形状を有する
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から5のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the circuit board has a shape lacking one side of a polygon when viewed in plan.
  10.  前記回路ユニットは、複数の回路基板を有し、当該複数の回路基板は、前記ケースの内周面に沿って並べて配置されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から5のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    6. The circuit unit according to claim 1, wherein the circuit unit includes a plurality of circuit boards, and the plurality of circuit boards are arranged side by side along an inner peripheral surface of the case. The lamp described.
  11.  前記回路基板は、平面状に展開した場合に、扇形の形状を有する
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から5のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the circuit board has a fan shape when deployed in a planar shape.
  12.  前記ケースと前記実装基板とが一体的に形成されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から11のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the case and the mounting substrate are integrally formed.
  13.  前記発光部と前記受電部または前記ケースとを熱的に接続する熱伝導部材をさらに備える
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から12のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 1 to 12, further comprising a heat conductive member that thermally connects the light emitting unit and the power receiving unit or the case.
  14.  前記熱伝導部材は、外周面に凹部が形成されており、前記凹部内に、前記電子部品の一部が位置している
     ことを特徴とする請求項13に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 13, wherein the heat conducting member has a concave portion formed on an outer peripheral surface, and a part of the electronic component is located in the concave portion.
  15.  前記凹部は、前記熱伝導部材の外周面においてランプ軸廻りに連続的に形成されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項14に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 14, wherein the recess is continuously formed around the lamp axis on the outer peripheral surface of the heat conducting member.
  16.  前記回路基板は、前記実装基板に固定されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から15のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 1, wherein the circuit board is fixed to the mounting board.
  17.  前記発光部の前記発光部から発せられる光の主出射方向側を覆う状態で配される透光性のグローブと、
     前記グローブ内に位置するように前記発光部を前記受電部または前記ケースに対して支持する支持部材と、を備える
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から16のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    A translucent glove arranged in a state of covering the main emission direction side of the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the light emitting unit;
    The lamp according to any one of claims 1 to 16, further comprising: a support member that supports the light emitting unit with respect to the power receiving unit or the case so as to be positioned in the globe.
  18.  前記実装基板は、透光性の部材から成る
     ことを特徴とする請求項17に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 17, wherein the mounting substrate is made of a translucent member.
  19.  前記半導体発光素子から出射された光の少なくとも一部を、前記実装基板を避けた斜め後方へ指向させる光学部材が配置されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項17または18に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 17 or 18, wherein an optical member for directing at least a part of light emitted from the semiconductor light emitting element obliquely rearward away from the mounting substrate is disposed.
  20.  前記複数の半導体発光素子は、前記実装基板上に環状に配置されており、
     前記光学部材は、前記半導体発光素子と対向する環形状の反射面を有し、当該反射面によって前記半導体発光素子から出射された光の少なくとも一部を、前記実装基板を避けた斜め後方へ指向させる
     ことを特徴とする請求項19に記載のランプ。
    The plurality of semiconductor light emitting elements are arranged in an annular shape on the mounting substrate,
    The optical member has a ring-shaped reflecting surface facing the semiconductor light emitting element, and directs at least part of the light emitted from the semiconductor light emitting element by the reflecting surface obliquely backward avoiding the mounting substrate. The lamp according to claim 19, characterized in that:
  21.  前記光学部材は、ビームスプリッタであって、前記反射面に入射した光の一部を、前記実装基板を避けた斜め後方へ指向させ、前記反射面に入射した光の他の一部を前方に向けて透過させる
     ことを特徴とする請求項19に記載のランプ。
    The optical member is a beam splitter, and directs a part of the light incident on the reflecting surface obliquely backward avoiding the mounting substrate, and forwards another part of the light incident on the reflecting surface forward. The lamp according to claim 19, wherein the lamp is transmitted toward the lamp.
  22.  前記光学部材には、前記半導体発光素子と対向する箇所に、前記半導体発光素子から出射された光の他の一部を前方へ漏らすための開口部が設けられている
     ことを特徴とする請求項19または20に記載のランプ。
    The optical member is provided with an opening for leaking forward another part of the light emitted from the semiconductor light emitting element at a location facing the semiconductor light emitting element. The lamp according to 19 or 20.
  23.  前記支持部材は、前記熱伝導部材を兼ねる
     ことを特徴とする請求項17から22のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 17 to 22, wherein the support member also serves as the heat conducting member.
  24.  前記支持部材は、導光部材であり、前記半導体発光素子から後方側に発せられ、前記実装基板を透過した光を斜め後方へ指向させる
     ことを特徴とする請求項18に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 18, wherein the support member is a light guide member, and emits light rearward from the semiconductor light emitting element and passes through the mounting substrate obliquely rearward.
  25.  前記支持部材は、前記発光部が固定される基台部と、前記受電部または前記ケースに固定される支持本体部とから成る
     ことを特徴とする請求項17に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 17, wherein the support member includes a base portion to which the light emitting portion is fixed, and a support main body portion fixed to the power receiving portion or the case.
  26.  前記支持台部および前記支持本体部は、一体的に形成されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項25に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 25, wherein the support base part and the support main body part are integrally formed.
  27.  前記実装基板は、可撓性を有し、前記基台部の表面に貼付されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項25または26に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 25 or 26, wherein the mounting substrate has flexibility and is attached to a surface of the base portion.
  28.  前記基台部は、前記実装基板を兼ね、前記複数の半導体発光素子は、前記基台部上に配置されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項25または26に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 25 or 26, wherein the base portion also serves as the mounting substrate, and the plurality of semiconductor light emitting elements are disposed on the base portion.
  29.  前記基台部は、多角錐台形状を有する
     ことを特徴とする請求項25から28のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 25 to 28, wherein the base portion has a polygonal frustum shape.
  30.  前記基台部は、円錐台形状を有する
     ことを特徴とする請求項25から28のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 25 to 28, wherein the base portion has a truncated cone shape.
  31.  前記基台部は、多面体形状を有する
     ことを特徴とする請求項25から28のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 25 to 28, wherein the base portion has a polyhedral shape.
  32.  前記グローブは、前記発光部に近接している部分の厚みが、その他の部分の厚みと比較して厚い
     ことを特徴とする請求項25から31のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 25 to 31, wherein the globe is thicker in a portion adjacent to the light emitting unit than in other portions.
  33.  前記グローブは、前記発光部に近接している部分の内周面に、光拡散処理が施されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項25から31のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 25 to 31, wherein the globe is subjected to a light diffusion process on an inner peripheral surface of a portion close to the light emitting unit.
  34.  前記光拡散処理は、前記グローブの厚み方向に窪んだ凹部が複数形成されることにより施されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項33に記載のランプ。
    34. The lamp according to claim 33, wherein the light diffusion treatment is performed by forming a plurality of recesses recessed in the thickness direction of the globe.
  35.  前記光拡散処理は、前記グローブの前記発光部に近接している部分の内周面上に、光拡散層が形成されることにより施されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項33に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 33, wherein the light diffusion treatment is performed by forming a light diffusion layer on an inner peripheral surface of a portion of the globe that is close to the light emitting portion. .
  36.  前記光拡散処理は、前記グローブの前記発光部に近接している部分の内周面に、光拡散部材が取着されることにより施されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項33に記載のランプ。
    34. The lamp according to claim 33, wherein the light diffusion treatment is performed by attaching a light diffusion member to an inner peripheral surface of a portion of the globe that is close to the light emitting portion. .
  37.  前記ケースは、第1ケース部と第2ケース部とから成る
     ことを特徴とする請求項1から10のいずれか1項に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the case includes a first case portion and a second case portion.
  38.  前記第1ケース部は、前記点灯回路ユニットを収容し、
     前記第2ケース部は、前記第1ケース部の前記発光部から発せられる光の主出射方向側に配され前記発光部を収容し、前記第2ケース部の側面には、前記半導体発光素子からの出射光を当該第2ケース部外部に漏らす窓部が1つまたは複数設けられている
     ことを特徴とする請求項37に記載のランプ。
    The first case portion accommodates the lighting circuit unit,
    The second case portion is disposed on a main emission direction side of light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first case portion and accommodates the light emitting portion, and a side surface of the second case portion is formed from the semiconductor light emitting element. The lamp according to claim 37, wherein one or a plurality of window portions for leaking the emitted light from the second case portion are provided.
  39.  前記実装基板は、長尺な形状を有し、
     前記複数の半導体発光素子は、前記実装基板の長手方向に沿って列状に配置され、
     前記実装基板の長手方向における両端部に、前記第1ケース部および前記第2ケース部がそれぞれ配されており、
     前記第1ケース部および前記第2ケース部のうち、少なくとも一方の内部に前記回路ユニットが収容されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項37に記載のランプ。
    The mounting substrate has a long shape,
    The plurality of semiconductor light emitting elements are arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction of the mounting substrate,
    The first case portion and the second case portion are arranged at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the mounting substrate,
    The lamp according to claim 37, wherein the circuit unit is accommodated in at least one of the first case part and the second case part.
  40.  前記回路ユニットは、第1回路ユニット部と第2回路ユニット部とから成り、
     前記第1回路ユニット部および前記第2回路ユニット部は、前記第1ケース部および前記第2ケース部の内部にそれぞれ収容されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項39に記載のランプ。
    The circuit unit includes a first circuit unit part and a second circuit unit part,
    40. The lamp according to claim 39, wherein the first circuit unit part and the second circuit unit part are accommodated in the first case part and the second case part, respectively.
  41.  前記発光部を内部に収容し、少なくとも前記発光部から発せられる光の主出射方向側に位置する部分が透光性の材料から形成された長尺筒状のバルブを備え、
     前記第1ケース部および前記第2ケース部は、前記バルブの長手方向における両端部に嵌着されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項39または40に記載のランプ。
    The light emitting unit is housed inside, and includes a long cylindrical bulb in which at least a portion located on the main emission direction side of light emitted from the light emitting unit is formed of a translucent material,
    The lamp according to claim 39 or 40, wherein the first case portion and the second case portion are fitted to both end portions in a longitudinal direction of the bulb.
  42.  前記第1ケース部および前記第2ケース部は、前記バルブに嵌着されている側の端部における前記主出射方向側の部分が切り欠かれている
     ことを特徴とする請求項41に記載のランプ。
    The said 1st case part and the said 2nd case part are notched in the part by the side of the said main output direction in the edge part by which the said valve | bulb is fitted. 42. lamp.
  43.  前記バルブの少なくとも前記主出射方向側に位置する部分の内周面には、光拡散処理が施されている
     ことを特徴とする請求項41または42に記載のランプ。
    The lamp according to claim 41 or 42, wherein a light diffusion process is applied to an inner peripheral surface of at least a portion of the bulb located on the main emission direction side.
PCT/JP2013/001602 2012-09-20 2013-03-12 Lamp WO2014045474A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013531976A JP5379336B1 (en) 2012-09-20 2013-03-12 lamp
CN201390000714.1U CN204805983U (en) 2012-09-20 2013-03-12 Lamp

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2012-206891 2012-09-20
JP2012206891 2012-09-20

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014045474A1 true WO2014045474A1 (en) 2014-03-27

Family

ID=50340817

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2013/001602 WO2014045474A1 (en) 2012-09-20 2013-03-12 Lamp

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN204805983U (en)
WO (1) WO2014045474A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2016181441A (en) * 2015-03-24 2016-10-13 アイリスオーヤマ株式会社 Luminaire

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011124469A1 (en) * 2010-04-07 2011-10-13 Osram Gesellschaft mit beschränkter Haftung Semiconductor lamp
JP2012252992A (en) * 2011-06-06 2012-12-20 Ganho So Multifunctional chargeable led lighting tool

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011124469A1 (en) * 2010-04-07 2011-10-13 Osram Gesellschaft mit beschränkter Haftung Semiconductor lamp
JP2012252992A (en) * 2011-06-06 2012-12-20 Ganho So Multifunctional chargeable led lighting tool

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2016181441A (en) * 2015-03-24 2016-10-13 アイリスオーヤマ株式会社 Luminaire

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN204805983U (en) 2015-11-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4995997B2 (en) lamp
JP5143307B2 (en) Light bulb shaped lamp and lighting device
JP5406347B2 (en) lamp
JP5551552B2 (en) lamp
WO2012098600A1 (en) Light bulb-type lamp and illumination device
JP2010055993A (en) Lighting system and luminaire
JP4971530B2 (en) lamp
JP2011054340A (en) Lighting device
JP5129411B1 (en) lamp
WO2013099074A1 (en) Lamp and lighting apparatus using same
JP5524793B2 (en) lamp
WO2014045474A1 (en) Lamp
JP5379336B1 (en) lamp
WO2013132566A1 (en) Lamp and illuminating apparatus
JP5074641B1 (en) Light source for illumination
JP6078902B2 (en) Illumination light source and illumination device
JP5824680B2 (en) Lamp and lighting device
JP5681969B2 (en) lamp
JP5524799B2 (en) lamp
JP5551562B2 (en) lamp
JP2014146570A (en) Lamp and illumination device
JP2012074256A (en) Lamp
JP2012074249A (en) Lamp
JP2013127879A (en) Lighting device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201390000714.1

Country of ref document: CN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2013531976

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13838839

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 13838839

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1